WO2026070928A1 - Measurement device - Google Patents
Measurement deviceInfo
- Publication number
- WO2026070928A1 WO2026070928A1 PCT/JP2025/033735 JP2025033735W WO2026070928A1 WO 2026070928 A1 WO2026070928 A1 WO 2026070928A1 JP 2025033735 W JP2025033735 W JP 2025033735W WO 2026070928 A1 WO2026070928 A1 WO 2026070928A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- measurement
- unit
- fluorescent dye
- sample
- cells
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/483—Physical analysis of biological material
- G01N33/487—Physical analysis of biological material of liquid biological material
- G01N33/49—Blood
Definitions
- This invention relates to a measuring device for analyzing cells in a sample.
- Patent Document 1 describes preparing a measurement sample from a blood specimen, measuring test items such as white blood cell count and white blood cell classification, and then preparing other measurement samples and performing additional measurements based on the measurement results.
- the present invention aims to provide a measuring device that can reduce the need to prepare new measurement samples and perform additional measurements.
- the present invention is a measuring device for analyzing cells contained in a sample taken from a subject, comprising: an electrical measuring unit for electrically measuring cells; a first optical measuring unit for optically measuring cells; a second optical measuring unit for optically measuring hemoglobin contained in the sample; a sample preparation unit for preparing a measurement sample for measurement by at least one of the electrical measuring unit, the first optical measuring unit, and the second optical measuring unit; and an analysis unit for providing the measurement results of the measurement sample, wherein the sample preparation unit measures (1) red blood cell count, white blood cell count, hemoglobin amount, hematocrit value, mean red blood cell count.
- the sample preparation unit includes a plurality of chambers corresponding to a first measurement item including blood cell volume, mean corpuscular hemoglobin, mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration, and platelet count; a second measurement item relating to the morphological classification of leukocytes; and a third measurement item different from the first and second measurement items; a plurality of reagent containers containing reagents including fluorescent dyes used for preparing the measurement sample; and a flow path for sending the measurement sample from the plurality of chambers to the first optical measurement unit.
- the sample preparation unit responds to a measurement order that includes a measurement instruction for at least one of the first measurement item, the second measurement item, or the third measurement item.
- the first optical measurement unit prepares a measurement sample using at least one chamber corresponding to a measurement instruction and at least one reagent container corresponding to at least one chamber.
- the sample preparation unit prepares a measurement sample by mixing a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye, which have different staining and fluorescence properties for cells, with the sample in at least one chamber corresponding to a measurement instruction.
- the first optical measurement unit uses a first fluorescence signal generated from a first fluorescent dye having staining properties for a first component of a cell, and a second fluorescent dye having staining properties for a second component of a cell.
- the device essentially measures an optical signal containing at least one of the following: a first fluorescence signal and a second fluorescence signal.
- the analysis unit then refers to the optical signal containing the first and second fluorescence signals and performs the following analyses to classify the measured cells: (A) a first analysis based on the differences in staining characteristics and fluorescence characteristics of the first and second fluorescence dyes; (B) a second analysis based on the differences in the first component in the measured cells; and (C) a third analysis corresponding to the differences in the second component in the measured cells.
- a measuring device that can reduce the need to prepare new measurement samples and perform additional measurements.
- This figure shows an example of the appearance of a measuring device.
- This figure shows an example of a fluid circuit in the measurement unit of the measuring device according to the first embodiment.
- This figure shows an example of a fluid circuit in the measurement unit of a measuring device.
- This figure shows an example of a sample preparation section in the measurement unit of a measuring device.
- This figure shows an example of a sample preparation section in a measurement unit.
- This figure shows an example of the optical system configuration for the FCM detection unit.
- This figure shows an example of the optical system configuration for the FCM detection unit.
- This flowchart shows an example of how the measuring device works.
- This table shows examples of information (flags) generated by the analysis unit.
- the measuring device 500 comprises, for example, a measuring unit 400 including a detection unit, and an analysis unit 300 which is an analysis unit.
- the analysis unit 300 is, for example, a personal computer with software for analyzing the sample to be measured.
- the measuring unit 400 is a unit for preparing and measuring the sample, and includes a flow cytometer.
- the analysis unit 300 and the measuring unit 400 are connected by a predetermined interface (e.g., USB (Universal Serial Bus), wireless LAN (Local Area Network), wired LAN, Bluetooth, etc.).
- the analysis unit 300 also performs operation control of the measuring unit 400.
- the measuring device 500 may also have a configuration in which the analysis unit 300 is provided within the measuring unit 400.
- the measurement unit 400 prepares the measurement sample by mixing the sample and reagents.
- a reagent containing a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye also called a “staining reagent” is used to prepare the measurement sample.
- a reagent containing a surfactant capable of dissolving red blood cells also called a “hemolytic reagent” is further used to prepare the measurement sample.
- the particles in the measurement sample are stained by the first and second fluorescent dyes.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are dyes with different staining and fluorescence properties for cells.
- the first component to which the first fluorescent dye binds and the second component to which the second fluorescent dye binds are different.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes for example, have fluorescence emission maxima in different wavelength ranges.
- the fluorescence emission maxima is the wavelength (peak wavelength) at which the fluorescent dye is excited by light with the highest fluorescence intensity.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes have maximum absorption maxima in different wavelength ranges. That is, the second fluorescent dye may emit fluorescence at a wavelength that can be detected separately from the fluorescence from the first fluorescent dye.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are, for example, dyes that have the ability to bind to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), which are components of cells.
- the fluorescence signals obtained from the first and second fluorescent dyes can be used to distinguish whether the mechanism of leukocyte increase in a sample from a subject with a higher leukocyte count than a healthy subject is neoplastic or reactive.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are selected such that one of them has a higher binding ability to DNA than the other, and the opposite is true for its binding ability to RNA.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are selected such that (1) the first and second fluorescent dyes have different binding abilities to DNA, (2) the first and second fluorescent dyes have different binding abilities to RNA, (3) the first fluorescent dye has different binding abilities to DNA and RNA, and (4) the second fluorescent dye has different binding abilities to DNA and RNA.
- the fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye will be greater than the fluorescence signal corresponding to the second fluorescent dye.
- the fluorescence signal corresponding to the second fluorescent dye will be greater than the fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye. This makes it possible to distinguish whether the mechanism of leukocyte increase in a sample from a subject with a higher leukocyte count than a healthy subject is neoplastic or reactive.
- the first fluorescent dye has higher staining ability for neoplastic leukocytes than for neoplastic leukocytes
- the second fluorescent dye has higher staining ability for neoplastic leukocytes than for neoplastic leukocytes.
- the first fluorescent dye has, for example, specific binding ability to DNA, but weaker binding ability to RNA than the second fluorescent dye.
- the second fluorescent dye has, for example, stronger binding ability to RNA than the first fluorescent dye.
- the reason the first fluorescent dye exhibits specific binding ability to DNA is, for example, the structure of the dye.
- the first fluorescent dye has a structure that easily penetrates the gaps in the double-stranded structure of nucleic acids in DNA, and thus has specific binding ability to DNA.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes have, for example, the property that their fluorescence intensity increases when they bind to nucleic acids.
- the difference in fluorescence intensity of the first fluorescent dye when bound to DNA and when not bound to DNA is about 10 times or more.
- both the first and second fluorescent dyes have the ability to bind to nucleic acids, but the first fluorescent dye has a higher binding ability to DNA and a lower binding ability to RNA than the second fluorescent dye.
- the first fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that emits fluorescence when excited by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 490 nm.
- the second fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that emits fluorescence when excited by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 610 nm to 750 nm, where its maximum absorption occurs.
- first and second fluorescent dyes which have the ability to bind to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), which are components of cells, is the measurement of reticulocytes (sometimes referred to as "RET" herein) and platelets (sometimes referred to as "PLT” herein).
- RET reticulocytes
- PLT platelets
- cells in a sample are stained using a first fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to DNA is superior to its ability to bind to RNA, and a second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to RNA is superior to its ability to bind to DNA.
- the first fluorescent dye has, for example, a higher binding ability to platelets containing DNA compared to its binding ability to reticulocytes.
- the second fluorescent dye has, for example, a higher binding ability to reticulocytes containing RNA but not DNA compared to its binding ability to platelets containing DNA.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes also have different fluorescence properties.
- the first fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 490 nm.
- the second fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence when it absorbs light in the wavelength range of 610 nm to 750 nm, where its maximum absorption occurs.
- reticulocytes and platelets can be measured without having to perform separate measurement operations for RET and PLT.
- a decrease in RET may indicate that the subject is suspected of having acute leukemia or aplastic anemia.
- the subject's hemostatic ability and bleeding risk can be determined based on the PLT measurement results.
- Example 3 of fluorescent dyes For example, by using a first fluorescent dye that can bind to the nucleolus, a component of cells, and a second fluorescent dye that can bind to RNA, another component of cells, it becomes possible to classify leukocytes and differentiate between blast cells and promyelocytes. For instance, cells in a sample are stained using a first fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to the nucleolus is greater than its ability to bind to RNA, and a second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to RNA is greater than its ability to bind to the nucleolus.
- Mature leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils, which are the target of leukocyte classification, do not possess nucleoli. Therefore, the binding ability of the first fluorescent dye to mature leukocytes is lower than that of the second fluorescent dye.
- Blast cells and promyelocytes possess nucleoli. The amount of nucleoli in blast cells and promyelocytes differs. Therefore, the amount of the first fluorescent dye that binds to blast cells and promyelocytes depends on the amount of nucleoli in each of them. The difference in the amount of bound first fluorescent dye is measured as a difference in fluorescence intensity.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes also have different fluorescence properties.
- the first fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 490 nm.
- the second fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 610 nm to 750 nm at its maximum absorption.
- blast cells and promyelocytes can be used, for example, to determine whether a subject is suspected of having leukemia. Prompt treatment can significantly impact the prognosis of leukemia associated with promyelocytic cells (acute promyelocytic leukemia). Effective medications exist for acute promyelocytic leukemia. Therefore, if blood sample testing can differentiate between blast cells and promyelocytic cells, it becomes possible to distinguish between patients requiring immediate treatment and those who do not.
- Example 4 of fluorescent dyes For example, by using a first fluorescent dye capable of binding to granules, which are components of cells, and a second fluorescent dye capable of binding to DNA, which is also a component of cells, it becomes possible to differentiate between basophils (sometimes referred to as "Baso" in this specification), a form of white blood cell, and immature granulocytes.
- Basophils sometimes referred to as "Baso” in this specification
- a first fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to granules in cells is more dominant than its ability to bind to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA)
- a second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to DNA is more dominant than its ability to bind to granules in cells
- reagents may be used to measure Baso, other white blood cells, and nucleated red blood cells. In this case, for example, to stain nucleated red blood cells, measurements are performed using a fluorescent dye capable of staining DNA.
- Baso and other white blood cells are classified based on scattered light.
- a fluorescent dye capable of staining DNA By using a first fluorescent dye capable of staining granules contained in baso (e.g., basophilic granules) in addition to a second fluorescent dye capable of staining DNA, it becomes possible to distinguish between baso and immature granulocytes.
- the first fluorescent dye can specifically bind to granules contained in baso, for example.
- the first fluorescent dye By using such a first fluorescent dye, it becomes possible to prepare a sample so that, for example, the first fluorescent dye stains baso, but immature granulocytes are hardly stained. By analyzing the fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye, it becomes possible to distinguish and identify baso stained with the first fluorescent dye from immature granulocytes, even in samples containing immature granulocytes.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes also have different fluorescence properties.
- the first fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 490 nm.
- the second fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 610 nm to 750 nm, where its maximum absorption occurs.
- Baso other white blood cells, and nucleated red blood cells
- by preparing a measurement sample using the first fluorescent dye in addition to the second fluorescent dye and acquiring an optical signal with the FCM detection unit 460 it becomes possible to accurately measure Baso even in samples containing immature granulocytes, without performing remeasurement to distinguish between Baso and immature granulocytes.
- Chronic myeloid leukemia is a disease associated with an abnormal increase in Baso. If Baso and immature granulocytes can be distinguished and each can be accurately counted, an abnormal increase in Baso can be judged more accurately.
- particles in the sample stained with the first and second fluorescent dyes are analyzed.
- particles in the sample refers to formed elements contained in the sample that can be individually measured by the FCM detection unit 460 described later.
- particles in the sample include cells, hemolyzed red blood cell remnants (red blood cell ghosts), lipid particles, fungi, and bacteria.
- Cells include, for example, leukocytes, red blood cells, and platelets (including aggregated platelets).
- the sample to be processed by the measurement unit 400 is contained in the sample container 100 (see Figure 2).
- the sample container 100 is, for example, a blood collection tube.
- the sample is a body fluid or its dilution collected from the subject.
- body fluids include blood, body cavity fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, synovial fluid, peritoneal dialysis drainage fluid, and bronchoalveolar lavage fluid.
- Blood is, for example, peripheral blood.
- body cavity fluids include ascites, pleural fluid, and pericardial fluid. Dilutions of body fluids are obtained by diluting the body fluid with a suitable aqueous solvent such as water, physiological saline, or buffer solution.
- the buffer solution preferably has a buffering effect at a pH near neutral (for example, a pH of 6 to 8).
- sample diluents may also be used.
- blood samples blood and its dilutions will also be referred to as "blood samples,” and body fluids other than blood and their dilutions will also be referred to as "non-blood samples.”
- the preferred sample is a blood sample.
- Blood samples may contain anticoagulants. Examples of such anticoagulants include ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), EDTA salts (e.g., EDTA-2K, EDTA-2Na, etc.), sodium citrate, heparin, and warfarin.
- EDTA ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid
- EDTA salts e.g., EDTA-2K, EDTA-2Na, etc.
- the sample is measured by the FCM detection unit 460 of the measurement unit 400.
- the FCM detection unit 460 light is irradiated onto each particle in the sample flowing through the flow cell, and the optical signal of each particle is acquired.
- fluorescence originating from the first and second fluorescent dyes is generated from the particles in the sample.
- scattered light is emitted from the particles upon light irradiation. This scattered light includes lateral and forward scattered light.
- the optical signal includes the first and second fluorescence signals corresponding to each fluorescence, and the scattered light signal corresponding to the scattered light.
- the acquired optical signal is A/D converted to obtain digital data.
- the analysis unit 300 analyzes the digital data acquired by the measurement unit 400 to detect or classify particles in the sample.
- the measuring device 500 of the first embodiment may be an automated blood cell analyzer that performs at least one of counting and classifying leukocytes in a blood sample and enables differentiation of the mechanism of leukocyte increase.
- the measuring device 500 can, for example, provide information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase.
- FIG 2 an example of the configuration of the fluid system in the measuring unit 400 of the measuring device of the first embodiment will be described.
- the measuring unit 400 comprises a sample preparation unit 440, a sample aspiration unit 450, and an FCM detection unit 460.
- the sample preparation unit 440 has a chamber 420 and a fluid delivery mechanism 430.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 is a mechanism for aspirating the sample T in the sample container 100 and has a sample aspiration nozzle 451.
- the FCM detection unit 460 is a first optical measuring unit that optically measures cells and acquires optical signals emitted from individual particles in the measurement sample.
- the FCM detection unit 460 includes a light source, flow cell, dichroic mirror, and light-receiving element, as described later (see Figures 8-10).
- the sample aspiration nozzle 451 is capable of penetrating the sample container 100, which is sealed by the lid 100a.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 is capable of moving the sample aspiration nozzle 451 to insert it into the sample container 100.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 is capable of moving the sample aspiration nozzle 451 to an upper position in the chamber 420 in the XY direction.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 includes a quantitative unit 452 (e.g., a syringe pump) for aspirating and discharging the sample T using the sample aspiration nozzle 451.
- the liquid delivery mechanism 430 comprises a liquid delivery pipe 431 and a liquid delivery unit 432.
- the liquid delivery pipe 431 is located between the reagent container 200 and the chamber 420.
- the liquid delivery unit 432 delivers the reagent 12 from the reagent container 200 to the chamber 420 via the liquid delivery pipe 431.
- the reagent container 200 is mounted in a reagent container holder 60.
- the reagent container 200 contains the reagent 12, which includes a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye.
- the liquid delivery mechanism 430 is a mechanism that injects the reagent 12 from the reagent container 200 into the chamber 420 via the liquid delivery pipe 431. Within the chamber 420, the sample and the reagent 12 come into contact, staining the particles contained in the sample with the first and second fluorescent dyes.
- a suction tube 64 which forms the first end of the liquid delivery tube 431, is inserted into the reagent container 200.
- the second end of the liquid delivery tube 431 is connected to the chamber 420.
- the suction tube 64 may have a sharp tip so as to be able to penetrate the sealing film (also called a sealing member) of the reagent container 200 mounted in the reagent container holder 60.
- the suction tube is also called a piercer.
- the liquid delivery section 432 of the liquid delivery mechanism 430 includes a pump 433.
- the pump 433 is a quantitative unit that generates negative pressure for drawing reagent 12 from the reagent container 200 into the liquid delivery pipe 431 and positive pressure for supplying the drawn-in reagent to the chamber 420.
- the pump 433 may be, for example, a syringe pump or a diaphragm pump.
- the liquid delivery mechanism 430 may also include a plurality of valves.
- the liquid delivery mechanism 430 includes electromagnetic valves V1 and V2. For example, when the pump 433, which is composed of a syringe pump or a diaphragm pump, draws reagent 12 from the reagent container 200, electromagnetic valve V1 is opened and electromagnetic valve V2 is closed.
- the pump 433 generates negative pressure, filling the flow path between electromagnetic valves V1, V2 and the pump 433 with reagent.
- electromagnetic valve V1 When supplying the filled reagent to the chamber 420, electromagnetic valve V1 is closed, electromagnetic valve V2 is opened, and the pump 433 generates positive pressure. This allows the reagent 12 in the reagent container 200 to be supplied to the chamber 420.
- Chamber 420 is a container in which the measurement sample is prepared. Within Chamber 420, the reagent 12 and the sample are mixed to prepare a measurement sample containing particles stained with the first and second fluorescent dyes.
- the measurement unit 400 is provided with one or more chambers 420. Chamber 420 is connected to the waste liquid chamber 36 via an electromagnetic valve 37. After measurement by the FCM detection unit 460 is completed, the measurement sample remaining in Chamber 420 is discarded into the waste liquid chamber 36. Furthermore, before the next measurement sample is prepared, Chamber 420 is cleaned by a cleaning mechanism (not shown), and the resulting liquid is discarded into the waste liquid chamber 36.
- the measurement unit 400 is equipped with one or more reagent container holders 60.
- one reagent container 200 containing reagents with a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye is mounted in one reagent container holder.
- a reagent container containing the reagent with the first fluorescent dye and another reagent container containing the reagent with the second fluorescent dye may be mounted in different reagent container holders.
- a reagent container containing the reagents with the first and second fluorescent dyes and another reagent container containing a hemolytic reagent may be mounted in different reagent container holders.
- the reagent container 200 is a container that holds reagents.
- the reagent container 200 has an opening into which a suction tube 64, connected to the first end of the liquid delivery tube 431 of the liquid delivery mechanism 430, is inserted.
- a suction tube 64 is inserted into the opening of the reagent container 200 mounted on the reagent container holder 60.
- the first end of the liquid delivery tube 431 is fixed in a predetermined position inside the reagent container 200.
- the predetermined position may be, for example, a position where the tip of the suction tube 64 connected to the first end is close to the bottom inside the reagent container 200.
- the suction tube 64 inserted into the reagent container 200 remains fixed in the above-mentioned predetermined position, for example, while the reagent container 200 is mounted on the reagent container holder 60. Furthermore, at least while the measurements of multiple specimens are being performed (i.e., while multiple measurement samples corresponding to each of the multiple specimens are being prepared), the first end to which the suction tube 64 is connected is fixed in the predetermined position described above.
- the FCM detection unit 460 irradiates light onto individual particles in the sample being measured, which are flowing through the flow cell. As described above, when light is irradiated onto the particles, fluorescence is generated from the particles, each originating from the first and second fluorescent dyes, respectively.
- the FCM detection unit 460 acquires optical signals including a first fluorescence signal and a second fluorescence signal corresponding to each fluorescence.
- the FCM detection unit 460 acquires multiple optical signals corresponding to each of the multiple particles irradiated with light.
- the first fluorescence signal is the signal corresponding to the fluorescence originating from the first fluorescent dye of the stained particles.
- the second fluorescence signal is the signal corresponding to the fluorescence originating from the second fluorescent dye of the stained particles.
- the FCM detection unit 460 acquires a scattered light signal corresponding to the scattered light.
- the scattered light signal includes a side scattered light signal corresponding to side scattered light and a forward scattered light signal corresponding to forward scattered light.
- the FCM detection unit 460 may be equipped with multiple light sources.
- the FCM detection unit 460 may include a light source that emits light of a first wavelength capable of exciting the first fluorescent dye, and a light source that emits light of a second wavelength capable of exciting the second fluorescent dye.
- the FCM detection unit 460 may include a light source that emits light of a single wavelength, and be configured to detect the fluorescence from the first and second fluorescent dyes excited by this single-wavelength light.
- the measurement unit 400 comprises a sample preparation unit 440, a sample aspiration unit 450, a device mechanism unit 455, an FCM detection unit 460, and a measurement unit control unit 480.
- the sample preparation unit 440 includes a chamber for mixing the sample and reagent, and a reagent container holder 60 in which the reagent container is installed.
- the sample preparation unit 440 delivers the reagent from the reagent container installed in the reagent container holder 60 to the chamber via a liquid delivery tube.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 aspirates the sample from the sample container and discharges the aspirated sample into the chamber of the sample preparation unit 440.
- the measurement sample is prepared by mixing the sample and reagent in the chamber.
- the device mechanism unit 455 includes motors and actuators that move various parts of the measurement unit 400.
- the device mechanism unit 455 includes, for example, a mechanism for moving the sample container 100.
- the measurement unit control unit 480 comprises an analog processing unit 481, an A/D conversion unit 481a, IF (interface) units 484, 488, and 489, and a bus 485.
- the analog processing unit 481 processes the analog signal output from the FCM detection unit 460.
- the A/D conversion unit 481a converts the analog signal output from the analog processing unit 481 into a digital signal.
- the IF unit 484 electrically connects the A/D conversion unit 481a and the bus 485.
- the IF unit 488 electrically connects the sample preparation unit 440, the device mechanism unit 455, the sample aspiration unit 450, and the FCM detection unit 460 to the bus 485.
- the IF unit 489 electrically connects the bus 485 to the analysis unit 300.
- the bus 485 is electrically connected to the IF units 484, 488, and 489.
- the second embodiment of the measuring device 500 is a multi-parameter automated blood cell analyzer capable of counting and classifying leukocytes in a blood sample, outputting information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase, detecting red blood cells (RBCs)/platelets (PLTs), and measuring hemoglobin (HGB) concentration, in addition to performing at least one of these functions.
- the measuring unit 400 shown in Figure 4 comprises a sample preparation unit 440, a device mechanism unit 455, a sample aspiration unit 450, an FCM detection unit 460, an RBC/PLT detection unit 461, an HGB detection unit 462, and a measuring unit control unit 480.
- the sample preparation unit 440, sample aspiration unit 450, device mechanism unit 455, and FCM detection unit 460 are the same as those in the first embodiment of the measuring device.
- the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 is an electrical measurement unit that electrically measures cells. It introduces a measurement sample prepared from a blood sample and diluent into an aperture and counts red blood cells and platelets by detecting the change in electrical resistance that occurs when cells pass through the aperture.
- the HGB detection unit 462 is a second optical measurement unit that optically measures hemoglobin contained in the sample. It measures the hemoglobin concentration in the blood sample using the sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS) hemoglobin method.
- SLS sodium lauryl sulfate
- the HGB detection unit 462 obtains the hemoglobin concentration in the blood by irradiating a measurement sample prepared from a blood sample and SLS hemolytic agent with light at a wavelength of 555 nm, which is the absorption wavelength of SLS hemoglobin, and measuring the absorbance.
- the FCM detection unit 460, the RBC/PLT detection unit 461, and the HGB detection unit 462 may be collectively referred to as "detection units 460-462".
- the measurement unit control unit 480 comprises analog processing units 481, 482, and 483, A/D conversion units 481a, 482a, and 483a, IF units 484, 488, and 489, and a bus 485.
- the analog processing unit 481 processes the analog signal output from the FCM detection unit 460.
- the A/D conversion unit 481a converts the analog signal output from the analog processing unit 481 into a digital signal.
- the analog processing unit 482 processes the analog signal output from the RBC/PLT detection unit 461.
- the A/D conversion unit 482a converts the analog signal output from the analog processing unit 482 into a digital signal.
- the analog processing unit 483 processes the analog signal output from the HGB detection unit 462.
- the A/D conversion unit 483a converts the analog signal output from the analog processing unit 483 into a digital signal.
- the IF unit 484 electrically connects the A/D conversion units 481a, 482a, and 483a to the bus 485.
- the IF unit 488 electrically connects the sample preparation unit 440, the device mechanism unit 455, the sample aspiration unit 450, the FCM detection unit 460, the RBC/PLT detection unit 461, and the HGB detection unit 462 to the bus 485.
- the IF unit 489 electrically connects the bus 485 to the analysis unit 300.
- the bus 485 is electrically connected to the IF units 484, 488, and 489.
- the sample preparation unit 440 shown in Figure 4 comprises a first sample preparation unit 440A and a second sample preparation unit 440B (see Figure 5).
- the first sample preparation unit 440A prepares a first measurement sample for optical measurement by the FCM detection unit 460.
- the second sample preparation unit 440B prepares a second measurement sample for electrical resistance measurement by the RBC/PLT detection unit, and a third measurement sample for hemoglobin measurement by the HGB detection unit 462.
- the first sample preparation unit 440A has a first chamber 420.
- the first chamber 420 is connected to reagent containers R1 and R2.
- Reagent container R1 contains the hemolytic reagent.
- Reagent container R2 contains the diluent.
- the first chamber 420 is also connected to reagent container 200 via a liquid delivery tube 431 and a suction tube 64.
- Reagent container 200 contains the staining reagent.
- a flow path is provided between the first chamber 420 and the FCM detection unit 460.
- the second sample preparation unit 440B has a second chamber 55.
- the second chamber 55 is connected to reagent containers R2 and R3.
- Reagent container R2 is provided in common with the first sample preparation unit 440A.
- Reagent container R3 contains the SLS hemolytic agent.
- the SLS hemolytic agent is a reagent used to lyse red blood cells and prepare a sample suitable for hemoglobin measurement.
- the reagent container 200 which contains the staining reagent, is mounted in the reagent container holder 60.
- the reagent container holder 60 is equipped with a suction tube 64 for aspirating the staining reagent from the reagent container 200, and a suction tube lifting mechanism 65 for raising and lowering the suction tube 64.
- the tip of the suction tube 64 can penetrate (puncture) the sealing material of the reagent container 200.
- a cover 63 is connected to the suction tube lifting mechanism 65. When the suction tube lifting mechanism 65 descends and the suction tube 64 penetrates (punctures) the sealing material of the reagent container 200, the cover 63 also descends, covering the reagent container 200. When the suction tube lifting mechanism 65 rises, the cover 63 also rises, making the reagent container 200 removable from the outside.
- a liquid delivery mechanism 430 is provided between the suction tube 64 and the first chamber 420.
- the liquid delivery mechanism 430 comprises a liquid delivery tube 431 and a metering block 432.
- the liquid delivery tube 431 has its first end connected to the suction tube 64 and its second end connected to the first chamber 420.
- the metering block 432 comprises a metering unit 30 and electromagnetic valves V1 and V2.
- a syringe pump is used as the metering unit 30.
- a diaphragm pump for example, can also be used instead of a syringe pump.
- Electromagnetic valves V1 and V2 open and close the flow path.
- the metering unit 30 When delivering the staining reagent from the reagent container 200 to the chamber 420, the metering unit 30 applies negative pressure to the liquid delivery tube 431 with electromagnetic valve V1 open and electromagnetic valve V2 closed. As a result, the staining reagent is drawn from the tip of the suction tube 64 into the liquid delivery tube 431, and a fixed amount of staining reagent is filled into the flow path between the electromagnetic valves V1 and V2 and the quantitative unit 30. Next, with electromagnetic valve V1 closed and electromagnetic valve V2 open, the quantitative unit 30 applies positive pressure to the liquid delivery tube 431. This pushes out the fixed amount of staining reagent filled into the flow path between electromagnetic valves V1 and V2 and the quantitative unit 30, and the staining reagent is supplied to the chamber 420 through the liquid delivery tube 431.
- a quantitative section 22 and electromagnetic valves V3 and V4 are provided in the flow path between the reagent container R1 containing the hemolytic reagent and the first chamber 420.
- a syringe pump is used as the quantitative section 22.
- a diaphragm pump for example, can also be used instead of the syringe pump.
- Electromagnetic valves V3 and V4 open and close the flow path.
- the quantitative section 22, electromagnetic valves V3 and V4 quantitatively deliver the hemolytic reagent from the reagent container R1 to the first chamber 420 in the same manner as the electromagnetic valves V1 and V2 and the quantitative section 30 described above.
- a quantitative dispensing unit 33 and electromagnetic valves V5 and V6 are provided in the flow path between the reagent container R2 containing the diluent and the first chamber 420.
- a syringe pump is used as the quantitative dispensing unit 33.
- a diaphragm pump can also be used.
- Electromagnetic valves V5 and V6 open and close the flow path.
- the quantitative dispensing unit 33 and electromagnetic valves V5 and V6 quantitatively supply the diluent from the reagent container R2 to the first chamber 420.
- a waste liquid chamber 36 for containing unwanted solution is connected to the first chamber 420.
- An electromagnetic valve V7 for opening and closing the flow path is provided between the first chamber 420 and the waste liquid chamber 36.
- the first chamber 420 is connected to a pump 56A that supplies air into the first chamber 420 to agitate the liquid within it.
- the flow path between the reagent container R2, which contains the diluent, and the second chamber 55 is equipped with a quantitative unit 38 and solenoid valves V8 and V9.
- a syringe pump is used as the quantitative unit 38.
- a diaphragm pump for example, can also be used instead of the syringe pump.
- Solenoid valves V8 and V9 open and close the flow path.
- the quantitative unit 38 and solenoid valves V8 and V9 quantitatively supply the diluent from the reagent container R2 to the second chamber 55.
- a waste liquid chamber 41 which contains the unused solution, is connected to the second chamber 55.
- a solenoid valve V10 is provided to switch the flow path between a flow path from the second chamber 55 to the waste liquid chamber 41 and a flow path from the second chamber 55 to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and the HGB detection unit 462. Solenoid valve V13 will be described later.
- a quantitative dispensing unit 39 and electromagnetic valves V11 and V12 are provided in the flow path between the reagent container R3 containing the SLS hemolytic agent and the second chamber 55.
- a syringe pump is used as the quantitative dispensing unit 39.
- a diaphragm pump can also be used.
- Electromagnetic valves V11 and V12 open and close the flow path.
- the quantitative dispensing unit 39 and electromagnetic valves V11 and V12 quantitatively deliver the SLS hemolytic agent from the reagent container R3 to the second chamber 55.
- the second chamber 55 is connected to a pump 56B that supplies air into the second chamber 55 to agitate the liquid within it.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 has a suction tube 20 and a quantitative unit 21.
- the tip of the suction tube 20 is sharply formed.
- the suction tube 20 punctures the lid 100a that seals the sample container 100 and is inserted inside.
- the quantitative unit 21 With the suction tube 20 inserted inside the sample container 100, the quantitative unit 21 generates negative pressure, and the blood sample T contained in the sample container 100 is drawn into the suction tube 20.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 moves the suction tube 20 upward to remove it from the sample container 100 and moves the suction tube 20 horizontally above the first chamber 420.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 lowers the suction tube 20 relative to the first chamber 420, and the quantitative unit 21 generates positive pressure, thereby discharging the drawn blood sample into the first chamber 420.
- the sample aspiration unit 450 moves the suction tube 20 upward and horizontally above the second chamber 55, and discharges the blood sample into the second chamber 55 in the same manner as with the first chamber 420.
- the first chamber 420 is connected to the FCM detection unit 460 (see Figure 4).
- the blood sample discharged into the first chamber 420 is mixed with the staining reagent contained in the reagent container 200 and the hemolytic reagent contained in the reagent container R1 to prepare the measurement sample.
- red blood cells are hemolyzed by the hemolytic reagent.
- particles containing white blood cells are stained with the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye.
- the measurement sample is prepared, for example, as follows: First, the hemolytic reagent is supplied to the first chamber 420, and then the blood sample is discharged into the first chamber 420. Air is supplied to the first chamber 420, and the blood sample and the hemolytic reagent are stirred.
- the staining reagent is supplied to the first chamber 420 containing the mixture of the blood sample and the hemolytic reagent. Air is supplied to the first chamber 420, and the mixture and the staining reagent are stirred. The reaction between the fluorescent dye and the particles proceeds within the first chamber 420.
- the reaction time is, for example, less than 1 minute, preferably less than 50 seconds, and more preferably less than 45 seconds. This stains the particles containing normal leukocytes and, if present, abnormal cells in the blood sample with the first and second fluorescent dyes, preparing the measurement sample.
- the FCM detection unit 460 is connected to a pump (not shown), and the pump drives the measurement sample from the first chamber 420 to the FCM detection unit 460 via a flow path.
- the FCM detection unit 460 acquires multiple optical signals from each particle, including fluorescence corresponding to the first and second fluorescent dyes.
- the second chamber 55 is connected to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and the HGB detection unit 462.
- the electromagnetic valve V13 switches between supplying the measurement sample from the second chamber 55 to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and supplying it to the HGB detection unit 462.
- the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and the HGB detection unit 462 are connected to a pump (not shown), and the measurement sample in the second chamber 55 is supplied to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and the HGB detection unit 462, respectively, by the drive of the pump.
- the second chamber 55 is used to prepare both the measurement sample for RBC/PLT detection and the measurement sample for HGB detection.
- measurement samples are prepared, for example, as follows: First, a diluent is supplied from the reagent container R2 to the second chamber 55. Next, blood is discharged into the second chamber 55. This yields a measurement sample containing diluted blood. A portion of this sample is sent to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461, where electrical resistance detection is performed. Next, SLS hemolytic agent is supplied from the reagent container R3 to the sample remaining in the second chamber 55. This lyses the red blood cells, resulting in a sample containing SLS hemoglobin generated from hemoglobin. This sample is then sent to the HGB detection unit 462. In the example shown in Figure 5, the sample for RBC/PLT detection and the sample for HGB detection are prepared in a common second chamber 55; however, they may be prepared in separate chambers.
- the measuring device 500 having the above configuration is capable of measuring the Complete Blood Count (CBC) item, which consists of at least eight parameters: red blood cell count (RBC), white blood cell count (WBC), platelet count (PLT), hemoglobin concentration (HGB), hematocrit value (HCT), mean corpuscular volume (MCV), mean corpuscular hemoglobin level (MCH), and mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration (MCHC).
- CBC Complete Blood Count
- RBC red blood cell count
- WBC white blood cell count
- PHT platelet count
- HGB hemoglobin concentration
- HGB hematocrit value
- MCV mean corpuscular volume
- MH mean corpuscular hemoglobin level
- MCHC mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration
- the measuring device 500 may be configured to output information regarding the mechanism of white blood cell increase.
- the measuring device 500 may be configured to measure the DIFF item, which classifies white blood cells into multiple subgroups.
- other items for example, items measuring reticulocytes (RET
- Figure 5 illustrates a first sample preparation unit 440A configured to contain reagents containing a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye in a single reagent container 200, and to deliver the reagents in the single reagent container 200 into the chamber 420 by a single liquid delivery mechanism 430.
- the first sample preparation unit 440A shown in Figure 6 is configured to contain a reagent containing the first fluorescent dye in a first reagent container 200A, a reagent containing the second fluorescent dye in a second reagent container 200B, to deliver the reagents in the first reagent container 200A into the chamber 420 by a first liquid delivery mechanism 430a, and to deliver the reagents in the second reagent container 200B into the chamber 420 by a second liquid delivery mechanism 430b.
- This configuration also allows for staining of particles contained in the sample with two fluorescent dyes.
- the first sample preparation unit 440A in Figure 6 comprises one or more chambers 420 for preparing a measurement sample by mixing a reagent containing a first fluorescent dye, a reagent containing a second fluorescent dye, and a sample.
- the first reagent container 200A containing the reagent containing the first fluorescent dye, is mounted in the first holder portion of the reagent container holder 442.
- the second reagent container 200B containing the reagent containing the second fluorescent dye, is mounted in the second holder portion of the reagent container holder 442.
- the first liquid delivery mechanism 430a is provided for delivering the reagent from the first reagent container 200A to the chamber 420.
- the configuration of the first liquid delivery mechanism 430a is the same as that of the liquid delivery mechanism 430 described with reference to Figure 2.
- the second liquid delivery mechanism 430b is provided for delivering the reagent from the second reagent container 200B to the chamber 420.
- the configuration of the second liquid delivery mechanism 430b is the same as that of the first liquid delivery mechanism 430a.
- the liquid delivery pipes 431 of the two liquid delivery mechanisms 430a and 430b merge midway along the flow path and are connected to the chamber 420. In the example in Figure 6, an example is shown where the two liquid delivery pipes merge, but the two liquid delivery pipes may also be connected to the chamber 420 individually.
- the sample preparation unit 440 is equipped with multiple types of chambers into which the sample aspirated from the sample container 100 by the suction tube 20 is dispensed.
- the RBC/PLT reaction chamber 420A is a chamber for preparing a measurement sample by mixing the sample and diluent.
- the measurement sample prepared in chamber 420A is measured by the RBC/PLT detection unit 461.
- the HGB reaction chamber 420B is a chamber for preparing a sample for measurement by mixing the hemolytic agent, diluent, and sample.
- the sample prepared in chamber 420B is measured by the HGB detection unit 462.
- the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and 420D are chambers for preparing measurement samples for classifying leukocytes.
- the leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420C is used, for example, to prepare measurement samples for classifying leukocytes into several subpopulations (e.g., subpopulations including lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils).
- the measurement sample is prepared by mixing, for example, a hemolytic agent, a sample, and a staining solution (reagent) for staining the cells in the sample.
- the leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420D is a chamber for preparing measurement samples for classifying, for example, a subpopulation of basophils and a subpopulation of nucleated red blood cells, which are forms of leukocytes.
- the white blood cell count (WBC) may be counted by measuring the measurement sample prepared in the leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420D.
- a hemolytic agent, the specimen, and a staining solution (reagent) for staining the cells in the specimen are mixed to prepare the sample for measurement.
- the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D may be used for the same purpose.
- the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D may be chambers for preparing samples for classifying cells in a sample into at least (1) at least five subpopulations of leukocytes (e.g., subpopulations including lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils), and (2) subpopulations of nucleated erythrocytes.
- the hemolytic agents used in the preparation in the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D may have different compositions in each chamber.
- the staining solutions (reagents) used in the preparation in the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D may have different compositions in each chamber.
- the RET reaction chamber 420E is a chamber for preparing a sample for, for example, the measurement of reticulocytes.
- the sample a reagent containing a fluorescent dye corresponding to the reaction chamber 420E, and a diluent are mixed to prepare the sample for measurement.
- the sample preparation unit 440 may include other reaction chambers in addition to the reaction chamber 420 described above.
- the sample preparation unit 440 may include a reaction chamber 420 (PLT reaction chamber) for preparing a sample for measurement of platelets stained with a fluorescent dye in the FCM measurement unit 460.
- PKT reaction chamber PLT reaction chamber
- reaction chamber 420C and FCM detection unit 460 constitute one measurement channel.
- sample preparation unit 440 is equipped with five measurement channels corresponding to reaction chambers 420A to E. The number of measurement channels is not limited to this.
- the sample preparation unit 440 determines which of the multiple reaction chambers 420 illustrated in Figure 7 to use to prepare the measurement sample based on the measurement order for the sample. For example, when the measuring device 500 receives a measurement order that includes a CBC measurement instruction, the sample preparation unit 440 prepares the measurement sample in the RBC/PLT reaction chamber 420A, the HGB reaction chamber 420B, and the leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420D in order to obtain measurement results for at least eight parameters: RBC, WBC, PLT, HGB, HCT, MCV, MCH, and MCHC.
- the measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420A is measured in the RBC/PLT detection unit 461.
- the measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420B is measured in the HGB detection unit 462.
- the measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420D is measured in the FCM detection unit 460 to obtain the white blood cell count (WBC). Based on the measurement data obtained by detection units 460, 461, and 462, parameters corresponding to the above-mentioned CBC are obtained.
- WBC white blood cell count
- the sample preparation unit 440 prepares a measurement sample in the RBC/PLT reaction chamber 420A, HGB reaction chamber 420B, white blood cell classification reaction chamber 420C, and white blood cell classification reaction chamber 420D in order to obtain the results of white blood cell classification (for example, five classifications of lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils) and counting in addition to the CBC parameters.
- the measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420A is measured in the RBC/PLT detection unit 461.
- the measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420B is measured in the HGB detection unit 462.
- the samples prepared in reaction chambers 420C and 420D are measured by the FCM detection unit 460.
- the sample preparation unit 440 prepares the measurement sample in the reaction chamber 420 and supplies the measurement sample to the detection unit corresponding to the reaction chamber 420.
- the detection unit performs measurement for each measurement sample, and the analysis unit 300 provides analysis results for each measurement sample.
- the sample preparation unit 440 prepares measurement samples using first and second fluorescent dyes in at least one of the multiple reaction chambers 420.
- the sample preparation unit 440 may prepare measurement samples using the first and second fluorescent dyes in multiple reaction chambers 420.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes used in each reaction chamber 420 may differ.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes used in reaction chamber 420C may be different from those used in reaction chamber 420D.
- At least one of the first and second fluorescent dyes used in each reaction chamber 420 may be common to all other reaction chambers 420.
- at least one of the first and second fluorescent dyes used in reaction chamber 420C (e.g., the first fluorescent dye) and at least one of the first and second fluorescent dyes used in reaction chamber 420D may be common to all.
- Example of fluorescent dye application 1 In Example 1 of Use, first and second fluorescent dyes (see “Example 1 of Fluorescent Dyes” above) are used to distinguish whether the mechanism of leukocyte increase is neoplastic or reactive.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are included, for example, in at least one of the staining reagents used in the preparation of measurement samples in the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are used in the sample preparation in at least one of chambers 420C and D.
- the second fluorescent dye may be used in the measurement sample prepared in chamber 420C
- the first fluorescent dye may be used in the measurement sample prepared in chamber 420D.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes may be included in both of the staining reagents used in the preparation of measurement samples in the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D.
- the CBC (Cellular Blood Cell) and/or DIFF (Digestive Function) parameters mentioned above are fundamental test items in tests that classify and/or count cells in a blood sample. For example, the need for additional tests is determined based on the CBC or CBC + DIFF test results. Therefore, many measurement orders in tests performed by the measuring device 500 include instructions for CBC measurement, or instructions for CBC and DIFF measurement. For example, almost all measurement orders in the first blood test (e.g., referred to as the "initial test") for a patient visiting a medical institution include instructions for CBC measurement, or instructions for CBC and DIFF measurement.
- Additional tests based on the results of the initial test may not include instructions for CBC measurement, or instructions for CBC and DIFF measurement, but may only include a predetermined additional test item (e.g., reticulocytes: RET). In some cases, the test may be completed with only the initial test, without any additional tests.
- a predetermined additional test item e.g., reticulocytes: RET.
- the staining solution used in reaction chamber 420C contains the first and second fluorescent dyes
- the staining solution used in reaction chamber 420D contains the first and second fluorescent dyes
- both the staining solution used in reaction chamber 420C and the staining solution used in reaction chamber 420D contain the first and second fluorescent dyes
- the staining solution used in chamber C contains the second fluorescent dye and the staining solution used in chamber D contains the first fluorescent dye.
- a measurement using the first and second fluorescent dyes is performed in response to a measurement order that includes a measurement instruction for CBC + DIFF.
- a measurement using the first and second fluorescent dyes is performed in response to a measurement order that includes a measurement instruction for CBC or CBC + DIFF.
- the measurement instruction for CBC, or CBC + DIFF is included in almost all initial examination measurement orders, so measurement results containing information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase (neoplastic or reactive) can be obtained without additional tests. In other words, measurement results containing information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase (neoplastic or reactive) can be obtained with a single initial examination.
- measurement results containing information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase can be obtained based on the results obtained from the measurement operation using a single measurement channel.
- Application example 2 is an example in which reticulocytes and platelets are measured without separating the measurement operations for each.
- the RET reaction chamber 420E in Figure 7 is replaced with a RET/PLT reaction chamber 420F for preparing a sample for measuring RET and PLT.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes see “Example 2 of Fluorescent Dyes" above) are used.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are contained in, for example, the staining reagents used in sample preparation in the reaction chamber 420F.
- Sample preparation in the reaction chamber 420F and measurement by the FCM detection unit 460 are performed, for example, according to a measurement order including a RET measurement instruction.
- Platelets containing DNA are stained by the first fluorescent dye, which has a superior ability to bind to DNA than to RNA.
- Reticulocytes containing RNA but not DNA are stained by the second fluorescent dye, which has a superior ability to bind to RNA than to DNA. Since the first and second fluorescent dyes have different fluorescence properties, platelets and reticulocytes can be analyzed by analyzing the fluorescence signals corresponding to the first and second fluorescent dyes.
- a measurement sample is prepared using the first and second fluorescent dyes, so reticulocytes and platelets can be measured. Measurements for reticulocytes and platelets are performed together. Reticulocytes and platelets are measured simultaneously in a single measurement operation (sample preparation in reaction chamber 420F and measurement by FCM detection unit 460). In other words, reticulocytes and platelets can be measured using a single measurement channel. Since reticulocytes and platelets can be measured simultaneously without performing separate measurement operations for each, measurement time is reduced. Furthermore, since staining of reticulocytes and platelets can be performed with a single staining reagent, the number of reagents required in the measuring device is reduced, lowering the cost of performing the test. Because the reaction chamber for preparing the sample for reticulocyte measurement and the reaction chamber for preparing the sample for platelet measurement can be integrated into a single chamber, the measuring device can be made more compact.
- Example 3 of application is an example of performing leukocyte classification and distinguishing between blast cells and promyelocytes.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are used in the preparation of the measurement sample in the reaction chamber 420C shown in Figure 7.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are contained in staining reagents used, for example, in sample preparation in reaction chamber 420C.
- Sample preparation in reaction chamber 420C and measurement by FCM detection unit 460 are performed, for example, according to a measurement order including a DIFF measurement instruction.
- the first fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to nucleoli is superior to its ability to bind to RNA, stains blast cells and promyelocytes that have nucleoli.
- the second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to RNA is superior to its ability to bind to nucleoli, stains mature leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils.
- the amount of nucleoli in blast cells and promyelocytes differs.
- the amount of the first fluorescent dye that binds to blast cells and promyelocytes depends on the amount of nucleoli in each of the blast cells and promyelocytes.
- the difference in the amount of bound first fluorescent dye is measured as a difference in fluorescence intensity. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between blast cells and promyelocytes by analysis based at least on the difference in fluorescence intensity of the first fluorescent dye. Furthermore, staining with a second fluorescent dye allows for the simultaneous classification of mature leukocytes.
- a single measurement operation (sample preparation in reaction chamber 420C and measurement by FCM detection unit 460) performs both leukocyte classification and differentiation of blast cells and promyelocytes.
- leukocyte classification and differentiation of blast cells and promyelocytes are possible with a single measurement channel. Since the measurement of blast cells and promyelocytes can be performed in a single operation without requiring separate measurements for leukocyte classification, measurement time is reduced. The amount of information obtained from the measurement results of a single measurement channel increases, improving the ability to analyze blood cells based on the measurement results.
- Application example 4 is an example in which Baso and immature granulocytes can be differentiated.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are used in the preparation of the measurement sample in the reaction chamber 420D shown in Figure 7.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes are contained in, for example, the staining reagents used in sample preparation in reaction chamber 420D.
- Sample preparation in reaction chamber 420D and measurement by FCM detection unit 460 are performed, for example, according to a measurement order including a DIFF measurement instruction.
- the first fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to granules in cells is superior to its ability to bind to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), is used to stain Baso containing granules (e.g., basophilic granules).
- Staining cells with the second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to DNA is superior to its ability to bind to granules in cells, provides information for classifying nucleated red blood cells, Baso, and other white blood cells.
- immature granulocytes When immature granulocytes are present in the sample, it was sometimes difficult to distinguish between Baso and immature granulocytes when measuring with only fluorescent dyes capable of staining DNA.
- a second fluorescent dye capable of staining DNA as well as a first fluorescent dye capable of staining granules contained in baso (e.g., basophilic granules), it becomes possible to distinguish between baso and immature granulocytes.
- the first fluorescent dye can specifically bind to granules contained in baso, for example.
- a first fluorescent dye By using such a first fluorescent dye, it becomes possible to prepare a sample so that, for example, the first fluorescent dye stains baso, but immature granulocytes are hardly stained.
- By analyzing the fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye it becomes possible to distinguish and identify baso stained with the first fluorescent dye from immature granulocytes, even in a sample containing immature granulocytes.
- a single measurement operation (sample preparation in reaction chamber 420D and measurement by FCM detection unit 460) performs the classification of baso from other leukocytes and nucleated red blood cells, and the discrimination of baso from immature granulocytes all at once.
- a single measurement channel enables the classification of basoplasmic somatic cells (Basioplasma serotonin) and other leukocytes, as well as the differentiation of basoplasmic somatic cells (Basioplasma serotonin) and immature granulocytes. Because the amount of information obtained from a single measurement channel increases, the ability to analyze blood cells based on the measurement results is improved.
- the reaction chamber 420D can also be used, for example, in measurement orders that include only CBC (cardiac basin cell count). For CBC measurement orders, the results of the measurement using the reaction chamber 420D can be used, for example, to count the number of leukocytes in the CBC category.
- a single measurement channel enables the classification of basoplasmic somatic cells (Basioplasma serotonin) and other leukocytes, as well as the differentiation of basoplasmic somatic cells (Basioplasma serotonin) and immature granulocytes.
- the FCM detection unit 460 includes a first light source 411a, a second light source 411b, a flow cell 413, dichroic mirrors 418a, 418b, and 418c, side-scattered light receiving elements 412a and 412b, a forward-scattered light receiving element 416, and side-fluorescence receiving elements 422a and 422b.
- the first light source 411a and the second light source 411b emit excitation light of different wavelengths.
- the first light source 411a emits light of a first wavelength capable of exciting a first fluorescent dye
- the second light source 411b emits light of a second wavelength capable of exciting a second fluorescent dye.
- the first wavelength is, for example, 315 nm to 490 nm, preferably 400 nm to 450 nm, and more preferably 400 nm to 410 nm.
- the second wavelength is, for example, 610 nm to 750 nm, preferably 620 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably 633 nm to 643 nm.
- the light source for example, a semiconductor laser light source, an argon laser light source, a helium-neon laser, a mercury arc lamp, etc., can be used.
- the sample prepared in chamber 420 is flowed into the flow cell 413 of the FCM detection unit 460.
- the sample is flowed perpendicular to the plane of the paper. While the sample is flowing in the flow cell 413, light emitted from the first light source 411a is reflected by the dichroic mirror 418a and irradiates individual particles in the sample flowing within the flow cell 413. Light emitted from the second light source 411b passes through the dichroic mirror 418a and irradiates multiple particles in the sample flowing within the flow cell 413.
- the forward-scattered light (second forward-scattered light) corresponding to the light emitted from the second light source 411b is received by the forward-scattered light receiving element 416.
- the forward-scattered light receiving element 416 is positioned to receive the second forward-scattered light.
- the forward-scattered light receiving element 416 may be positioned to receive the forward-scattered light (first forward-scattered light) corresponding to the light emitted from the first light source 411a. In this case, the first forward-scattered light is received by the forward-scattered light receiving element 416.
- a separate light receiving element may be provided in addition to the forward-scattered light receiving element 416 to receive both the first and second forward-scattered light.
- the forward-scattered light is, for example, scattered light with a reception angle of 0 to about 20 degrees, preferably 0 to about 5 degrees.
- the forward-scattered light receiving element 416 is, for example, a photodiode.
- the lateral scattered light (first lateral scattered light) corresponding to the light emitted from the first light source 411a is reflected by the dichroic mirror 418b and received by the lateral scattered light receiving element 412a.
- the lateral scattered light (second lateral scattered light) corresponding to the light emitted from the second light source 411b is reflected by the dichroic mirror 418c and received by the lateral scattered light receiving element 412b.
- the lateral scattered light is, for example, scattered light with a reception angle of about 45 degrees to about 135 degrees, preferably about 90 degrees.
- the lateral scattered light receiving elements 412a and 412b are, for example, photodiodes.
- the lateral fluorescence (first lateral fluorescence) corresponding to the light generated when the first fluorescent dye is excited is transmitted through the dichroic mirror 418b and received by the lateral fluorescence photodetector 422a.
- the lateral fluorescence (second lateral fluorescence) corresponding to the light generated when the second fluorescent dye is excited is transmitted through the dichroic mirror 418c and received by the lateral fluorescence photodetector 422b.
- the lateral fluorescence photodetectors 422a and 422b are, for example, avalanche photodiodes.
- photomultiplier tubes may be used as the forward-scattering light detector 416, the lateral-scattering light detectors 412a and 412b, and the lateral fluorescence photodetectors 422a and 422b.
- the lateral-scattering light detectors 412a and 412b are also referred to as the first and second light-receiving sections, respectively.
- the relationship between the various types of light emitted when light is irradiated onto particles P passing through the flow cell 413 and the optical system of the FCM detection unit 460 will be explained.
- the light irradiated from the first light source 411a is light of the first wavelength L1
- the light irradiated from the second light source 411b is light of the second wavelength L2.
- FSC forward scattered light
- the photodetector 416 receives the forward scattered light corresponding to the light irradiated from the second light source 411b, so only the second forward scattered light corresponding to the second wavelength is shown, and the first forward scattered light corresponding to the first wavelength is omitted.
- a first side scattered light (SSC-1) corresponding to the first wavelength and a first side fluorescence (SFL-1) excited by the first wavelength are generated to the side of the direction of light propagation.
- a second lateral scattered light (SSC-2) corresponding to the second wavelength of light and a second lateral fluorescence (SFL-2) excited by the second wavelength of light are generated laterally relative to the direction of light propagation.
- FSC, SSC-1, SFL-1, SSC-2, and SFL-2 are received by photodetectors 416, 412a, 422a, 412b, and 422b, respectively.
- Each photodetector outputs a waveform electrical signal (also called an optical signal or analog signal) containing pulses corresponding to the received light intensity.
- the analog signal corresponding to FSC will be referred to as the "forward scattered light signal,” the analog signal corresponding to SSC-1 as the “first lateral scattered light signal,” the analog signal corresponding to SFL-1 as the “first fluorescence signal,” the analog signal corresponding to SSC-2 as the “second lateral scattered light signal,” and the analog signal corresponding to SFL-2 as the “second fluorescence signal.”
- One pulse of each analog signal corresponds to one particle (for example, one cell).
- Analog signals corresponding to various types of light are input to the analog processing unit 481, where processing such as noise reduction and smoothing is performed.
- the A/D conversion unit 482 samples the analog signals output from the analog processing unit 481 at a predetermined sampling rate (for example, sampling 1024 points at 10 nanosecond intervals, sampling 128 points at 80 nanosecond intervals, or sampling 64 points at 160 nanosecond intervals).
- the A/D conversion unit 482 digitizes the sampled analog signals to generate waveform data.
- the A/D conversion unit 482 samples and digitizes five types of analog signals corresponding to individual cells flowing through the flow cell 413 to generate forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data.
- the forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data are waveform data composed of multiple values arranged in time series.
- the generated waveform data is transmitted to the analysis unit 300, which calculates feature parameters representing the morphological characteristics of individual cells from the waveform data of each signal.
- feature parameters include, for example, peak value (height of the pulse peak), pulse width, pulse area, transmittance, Stokes shift, ratio, changes over time, and values correlated therewith.
- Optical information may be the characteristic parameters described above.
- Optical information includes at least first fluorescence information and second fluorescence information.
- the first fluorescence information is not particularly limited as long as it reflects the amount of fluorescent dye used to stain DNA in nucleated cells.
- the second fluorescence information is not particularly limited as long as it reflects the amount of fluorescent dye used to stain RNA in nucleated cells.
- the first fluorescence information and the second fluorescence information are the peak value of the first fluorescence data (the largest value among the first fluorescence data, also called the "first fluorescence intensity") and the peak value of the second fluorescence data (the largest value among the second fluorescence data, also called the "second fluorescence intensity"), respectively.
- Optical information further includes scattered light information.
- Scattered light information includes forward scattered light information, first lateral scattered light information, and second lateral scattered light information.
- the lateral scattered light information is not particularly limited as long as it reflects internal information such as the complexity of the cell structure, granular characteristics, nuclear structure, and degree of lobulation.
- the first and second lateral scattered light information are preferably the peak value of the first lateral scattered light data (the largest value among the first lateral scattered light data, also called the “first lateral scattered light intensity") and the peak value of the second lateral scattered light data (the largest value among the second lateral scattered light data, also called the "second lateral scattered light intensity"), respectively.
- the forward scattered light information is not particularly limited as long as it reflects the size of the cell.
- the forward scattered light information is preferably the peak value of the forward scattered light data (the largest value among the forward scattered light data, also called the "forward scattered light intensity").
- the FCM detection unit 460 comprises a light source 411, a flow cell 413, a dichroic mirror 418, a side-scatter light receiving element 412, a forward-scatter light receiving element 416, and side-fluorescence receiving elements 422a and 422b.
- the light source 411 emits light of a wavelength capable of exciting both the first and second fluorescent dyes. The light emitted from the light source 411 irradiates individual particles in the sample being measured, flowing through the flow cell 413.
- the light from the light source 411 irradiates particles in the sample stained with the first and second fluorescent dyes, generating first and second side fluorescence. That is, the FCM detection unit 460 can acquire first and second fluorescence signals corresponding to multiple particles in the sample (i.e., multiple particles stained with the first and second fluorescent dyes) using a single light source.
- the forward scattered light corresponding to the light emitted from the light source 411 is received by the forward scattered light receiving element 416.
- the side scattered light corresponding to the light emitted from the light source 411 is reflected by the dichroic mirror 418 and received by the side scattered light receiving element 412.
- the first side fluorescence is received by the side fluorescence receiving element 422a.
- the second side fluorescence passes through the dichroic mirror 418 and is received by the side fluorescence receiving element 422b. Therefore, the FCM detection unit 460 can acquire the forward scattered light signal, the first side scattered light signal, the first fluorescence signal, and the second fluorescence signal, each corresponding to multiple particles in the measurement sample.
- the light emitted from the light source 411 is preferably light containing multiple wavelengths in order to excite both the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye. Examples of such light include white light. Alternatively, if the first and second fluorescent dyes have maximum absorption in a wavelength range close to the point where they can be excited by a single wavelength of light, the light emitted from the light source 411 may be light of that single wavelength.
- the light emitted from the light source 411 may be light with a central wavelength of 400 nm to 420 nm, for example, light of 405 nm.
- the light irradiated from the light source 411 may have a central wavelength of 630 nm to 655 nm, for example, light at 633 nm.
- the FCM detection unit 460 can excite both the first and second fluorescent dyes and distinguish and detect the fluorescence generated from each fluorescent dye.
- the analysis unit 300 is electrically connected to the measurement unit 400 via an interface unit 305.
- the interface unit 305 is, for example, a USB interface.
- the analysis unit 300 comprises a processor 301, a main memory 302, a bus 303, a storage unit 304, an interface unit 305, a display unit 306, and an operation unit 307.
- the analysis unit 300 is configured, for example, by a personal computer (see the analysis unit 300 in Figure 1), and controls the measurement unit 400 of the measurement device 500 by executing a program stored in the storage unit 304.
- the analysis unit 300 for example, executes an analysis program and analyzes the data acquired from the measurement unit 400.
- the analysis unit 300 displays the analysis results on the display unit 306.
- the analysis unit 300 performs at least one of the classification and counting of particles (particularly cells) based on optical information including first fluorescence information corresponding to a first fluorescence signal and second fluorescence information corresponding to a second fluorescence signal.
- the optical information further includes scattered light information corresponding to a scattered light signal.
- the scattered light information includes lateral scattered light information corresponding to a lateral scattered light signal and forward scattered light information corresponding to a forward scattered light signal. If the white blood cell count is increased compared to normal levels due to the subject's health condition or disease, the analysis unit 300 can generate information regarding the mechanism of the white blood cell increase based on the optical information.
- the analysis unit 300 may classify cells based on the optical information of each of the multiple particles. For example, the analysis unit 300 may classify a cell by inputting waveform data corresponding to a single cell (e.g., waveform data corresponding to at least one, preferably multiple, of forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data) as optical information into a trained AI algorithm.
- waveform data corresponding to a single cell e.g., waveform data corresponding to at least one, preferably multiple, of forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data
- the analysis unit 300 may classify cells based on the characteristic parameters (e.g., peak value, pulse width, and pulse area) of the waveform data corresponding to a single particle (e.g., forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data) as optical information.
- characteristic parameters e.g., peak value, pulse width, and pulse area
- One method for classifying particles into multiple types using multiple characteristic parameters is to plot the particles in a multidimensional coordinate space with multiple parameters as axes, classify at least some particles into multiple groups corresponding to multiple types, determine the degree of belonging of each particle to each group based on the distance between the centroid position of each group and the particle, and then reclassify the particles based on the degree of belonging to classify multiple particles into multiple types.
- classification based on an AI algorithm may be performed for some particles in a single sample, while classification based on characteristic parameters may be performed for other particles.
- the processor 301 is a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and executes programs loaded from the storage unit 304 into the main memory 302.
- the storage unit 304 is, for example, a hard disk or an SSD (Solid State Drive).
- the storage unit 304 stores, for example, programs for controlling the measurement unit 400 and programs for analyzing data acquired by the measurement unit 400.
- the display unit 306 is equipped with a computer screen.
- the display unit 306 is electrically connected to the processor 301 via the interface unit 305 and the bus 303.
- the display unit 306 displays, for example, the analysis results of data acquired by the measurement unit 400.
- the control unit 307 includes a pointing device, such as a keyboard, mouse, or touch panel. Users, such as physicians or laboratory technicians, can input measurement orders into the measuring device 500 by operating the control unit 307. Measurement instructions are then input into the measuring device 500 according to the measurement order. The control unit 307 can also receive instructions from the user to display the test results. Users can operate the control unit 307 to view various information related to the test results, such as graphs, charts, and flag information assigned to the specimen.
- the measurement unit 400 is electrically connected to the analysis unit 300 via the interface unit 305.
- the analysis unit 300 performs the corresponding operation by executing a program deployed from the storage unit 304 to the memory 302 using the processor 301.
- the analysis unit 300 receives a measurement execution instruction from the user via an input operation via the operation unit 307.
- the analysis unit 300 sends instruction data to the measurement unit 400 to instruct the start of measurement, causing the measurement unit 400 to start the preparation process of the measurement sample.
- the measurement unit 400 dispenses the sample into the chamber 420.
- the measurement unit 400 injects the reagent 12 into the chamber 420 via the liquid delivery tube 431 connecting the reagent container 200 and the chamber 420.
- step S4 the measurement unit 400 mixes the sample with the reagent 12 containing the first and second fluorescent dyes in the chamber 420 to prepare a measurement sample.
- step S5 the measurement unit 400 sends the measurement sample prepared in the chamber 420 to the FCM detection unit 460 and irradiates multiple particles in the measurement sample with light to perform optical measurement. As a result, the measurement unit 400 acquires an optical signal including a first fluorescence signal and a second fluorescence signal corresponding to each fluorescence generated from the particles.
- the acquired optical signal is digitized by the A/D conversion unit 481a, etc., and transmitted from the measurement unit 400 to the analysis unit 300 as waveform data, such as waveform data of the first fluorescence data and waveform data of the second fluorescence data.
- the analysis unit 300 generates optical information from the received waveform data.
- the analysis unit 300 analyzes the optical information.
- the analysis unit 300 provides the analysis results. For example, the analysis unit 300 displays the analysis results on the display unit 306.
- the analysis system then completes the operation shown in Figure 12. The details of the analysis process in step S7 of Figure 12 will be described for each embodiment below. In the following embodiments, an example using feature parameters as optical information is described, but waveform data may also be used as optical information.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies leukocytes into subgroups based on the first fluorescence information, the second fluorescence information, and the scattered light information, and performs an analysis related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the classification.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the first fluorescence information, the second fluorescence information, and the scattered light information.
- the analysis unit 300 performs a process of classifying leukocytes into subgroups based on the second fluorescence information and the scattered light information, and a process of classifying leukocytes into subgroups based on the first fluorescence information and the second fluorescence information, and performing an analysis related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the classification.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis of the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the first fluorescence information and the second fluorescence information.
- leukocytes that the analysis unit 300 determined to be factors in the mechanism of leukocyte increase that may be neoplastic increase are also referred to as "first-order leukocytes.”
- leukocytes that the analysis unit 300 determined to be factors in the mechanism of leukocyte increase that may be reactive increase are also referred to as "second-order leukocytes.”
- First-order leukocytes may appear in the blood due to tumors such as multiple myeloma, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, and malignant lymphoma. Examples of first-order leukocytes include abnormal lymphocytes, blast cells, and immature erythroblasts.
- Abnormal lymphocytes are lymphocytes that have undergone neoplastic morphological changes and are clonal and homogeneous cells.
- Blast cells include myeloblasts and lymphoblasts. However, erythroblasts are not included in blast cells. Immature erythroblasts include proerythroblasts, basophilic erythroblasts, and polychromatic erythroblasts. Blast cells and immature erythroblasts themselves are not pathological cells, and in healthy individuals, these cells are mainly found in the bone marrow.
- leukocytes first-order leukocytes
- leukocytes are detected as leukocytes containing more DNA than other leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- II leukocytes Secondary leukocytes
- II leukocytes can appear in the blood as a result of immune responses, such as viral infections, drug allergies, and autoimmune diseases.
- II leukocytes are, for example, atypical lymphocytes.
- Atypical lymphocytes also known as reactive lymphocytes, are lymphocytes that have been activated and morphologically altered by antigen stimulation.
- II leukocytes are detected as white blood cells containing more RNA than other white blood cells such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- lateral scattered light information is used as scattered light information. More specifically, the intensity of the first lateral scattered light (also called “SSC-1 intensity”) is used as lateral scattered light information.
- the intensity of the second lateral scattered light also called “SSC-2 intensity” may be used instead of the SSC-1 intensity.
- SSC-1 intensity and SSC-2 intensity may be collectively referred to as "SSC intensity”.
- the first fluorescence intensity (“SF The second fluorescence intensity (also called “SFL-2 intensity”) is used as the second fluorescence information.
- a scattergram with SSC intensity on the x-axis and SFL-1 intensity on the y-axis is also called the “first scattergram.”
- a scattergram with SSC intensity on the x-axis and SFL-2 intensity on the y-axis is also called the “second scattergram.”
- step S11 the analysis unit 300 determines the position of the point corresponding to each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-1 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information.
- the analysis unit 300 creates a first scattergram based on the determined position of each point.
- step S12 the analysis unit 300 determines the position of the point corresponding to each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information.
- the analysis unit 300 creates a second scattergram based on the determined position of each point.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies the leukocytes in the sample into subpopulations based on the determined locations of each point.
- These subpopulations may include, for example, lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- the classification of leukocytes may also involve dividing them into at least two, three, or four subpopulations corresponding to these subpopulations.
- the leukocyte subpopulations preferably include lymphocytes, more preferably include lymphocytes and monocytes, and even more preferably include lymphocytes, monocytes, and neutrophils.
- the algorithms for detecting each subpopulation of leukocytes are known. For example, a program installed in the analysis unit 300 may classify the leukocytes in the sample into subpopulations. Alternatively, the leukocytes in each subpopulation may be counted.
- each subpopulation of leukocytes is distributed on each scattergram.
- “Lymp” refers to the lymphocyte population
- “Mono” refers to the monocyte population
- “Neut” refers to the neutrophil population
- “Eo” refers to the eosinophil population
- Baso refers to the basophil population.
- Figures 14A and 14B show only the subpopulations of leukocytes, and do not show the first and second leukocytes. In these figures, leukocytes are classified into five subpopulations: lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils, but are not limited to these.
- Leukocytes may also be classified into two subpopulations: mononuclear cells and multinuclear cells. Leukocytes may also be classified into three subpopulations: lymphocytes, monocytes, and neutrophils. Alternatively, leukocytes may be classified into four subpopulations: lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils. If necessary, the cells in each subpopulation of leukocytes may be counted. As can be seen from Figure 14A, the distribution range of SFL-1 intensity in each subpopulation of leukocytes is almost the same. This suggests that the amount of DNA in each subpopulation of leukocytes is approximately the same. In Figures 14A and B, leukocytes are classified using both the first and second scattergrams, but leukocytes may be classified using only one of the scattergrams. Preferably, leukocytes are classified using the second scattergram.
- step S14 the analysis unit 300 detects the first leukocytes based on the SFL-1 intensity of each detected particle. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold as the first leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the first threshold is, for example, a value greater than or equal to the SFL-1 intensity exhibited by leukocytes classified into each of the subpopulations of Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo.
- the first threshold can be set to the maximum value or higher of the SFL-1 intensity of any subpopulation of leukocytes (preferably the lymphocyte subpopulation or the monocyte subpopulation).
- the maximum value of the SFL-1 intensity of a subpopulation of leukocytes refers to the highest value among the SFL-1 intensities of cells classified into that subpopulation.
- the first threshold may be a value predetermined based on the results of measuring a sample obtained from a healthy individual (e.g., peripheral blood) and classifying the leukocytes into the aforementioned subpopulations.
- the analysis unit 300 can, for example, gate the region on the first scattergram where the SFL-1 intensity is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the region where the SFL-1 intensity is greater than or equal to a first threshold is, for example, the region enclosed by the dashed line on the first scattergram. Within this region enclosed by the dashed line, particles showing an SFL-1 intensity greater than the first threshold on the first scattergram may appear.
- the arrow indicates the maximum value of the SFL-1 intensity of the lymphocyte population of leukocytes as an example of the first threshold.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on the differences in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the differences in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes (such an analysis may be referred to as "first analysis” in this specification). For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the differences in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 15) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figure 16, described later) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies the cells using a scattergram based on the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) (example in Figure 15) and a scattergram based on the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) (example in Figure 16).
- the inventors found that in samples in which leukocytes are increased due to a neoplastic mechanism (for example, samples containing abnormal lymphocytes, blast cells, or immature erythroblasts), particles showing a higher SFL-1 intensity than leukocytes appear in the first scattergram.
- the first fluorescent dye is a dye that specifically binds to DNA
- the SFL-1 intensity of the particles depends on the amount of the first fluorescent dye bound to the DNA of the particles.
- particles appearing in the area enclosed by the dashed line are detected as cells containing more DNA than leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils (i.e., cells to which more of the first fluorescent dye is bound than leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils).
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on differences in a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 15) in multiple measured cells (such an analysis may be referred to herein as the "second analysis").
- the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 15) into multiple populations according to a first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1).
- the analysis unit 300 classifies cells corresponding to SFL-1 higher than a first threshold as first leukocytes, and cells corresponding to SFL-1 lower than the first threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- the analysis unit 300 detects secondary leukocytes based on the SFL-2 intensity of each particle. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than a second threshold as secondary leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected secondary leukocytes.
- the second threshold is, for example, a value greater than or equal to the SFL-2 intensity exhibited by leukocytes classified into each subpopulation of Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo.
- the monocyte subpopulation usually exhibits a higher SFL-2 intensity than the other subpopulations.
- the second threshold can be set to, for example, the maximum value of the SFL-2 intensity of the monocyte subpopulation of leukocytes or a higher value.
- the maximum SFL-2 intensity of the monocyte population of white blood cells refers to the highest SFL-2 intensity among cells classified as monocytes.
- the second threshold may be a predetermined value based on, for example, the results of measuring and classifying white blood cells from a sample obtained from a healthy individual (e.g., peripheral blood).
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate the region on the second scattergram where the SFL-2 intensity is greater than or equal to the second threshold, and detect particles appearing within that region as second leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected second leukocytes.
- the region where the SFL-2 intensity is greater than or equal to the second threshold is, for example, the region enclosed by the dashed line on the second scattergram. Within this dashed region, particles showing an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold on the second scattergram may appear.
- the arrow indicates the maximum SFL-2 intensity of the monocyte population of leukocytes as an example of the second threshold.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on differences in the second component (RNA in the example of Figure 16) in multiple measured cells (such an analysis may be referred to herein as the "third analysis"). For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a second fluorescent dye for a second component (RNA in the example in Figure 16) into multiple groups according to their second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the example in Figure 16, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells corresponding to an SFL-2 higher than the second threshold as second leukocytes, and cells corresponding to an SFL-2 lower than the second threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- SFL-2 second fluorescence intensity
- the inventors found that in samples containing leukocytes increased by the reactivity-enhancing mechanism (e.g., atypical lymphocytes), a large number of particles exhibiting higher SFL-2 intensity than leukocytes classified into subgroups such as Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo appeared in the second scattergram. Since the second fluorescent dye has a high RNA-binding ability (higher than the first fluorescent dye), the SFL-2 intensity of a particle depends on the amount of the second fluorescent dye bound to the RNA of that particle.
- the reactivity-enhancing mechanism e.g., atypical lymphocytes
- particles appearing within the area enclosed by the dashed line are detected as cells containing more RNA than leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils (i.e., cells to which more of the second fluorescent dye is bound than leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils).
- the analysis unit 300 can identify first leukocytes based on the SFL-1 intensity and SSC intensity of each particle. Also, as a variation of step S15, the analysis unit 300 can identify second leukocytes based on the SFL-2 intensity and SSC intensity of each particle.
- leukocytes increased by neoplastic or reactive mechanisms are often mononuclear cells.
- lateral scattered light information is information that reflects the internal information of the cell structure. Therefore, by excluding particles other than leukocytes increased by neoplastic or reactive mechanisms based on SSC intensity, in addition to SFL-1 intensity or SFL-2 intensity, more accurate detection of leukocytes increased by neoplastic or reactive mechanisms becomes possible.
- the analysis unit 300 detects particles that show an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold and an SSC intensity within a first range as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold and an SSC intensity within the second range as second leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first and second leukocytes.
- the first and second ranges may be the same or different.
- “within the first range” and “within the second range” include the lower and upper limits of each numerical range.
- the lower limits of the first and second ranges can be determined, for example, based on the SSC intensity of the lymphocyte population of leukocytes.
- the lower limits of the first and second ranges may be the minimum, maximum, or representative value of the SSC intensity of the lymphocyte population of normal leukocytes.
- the upper limits of the first and second ranges can be determined, for example, based on the SSC intensity of the monocyte population or neutrophil population of leukocytes.
- the upper limits of the first and second ranges may be the minimum, maximum, or representative value of the SSC intensity of the monocyte population or neutrophil population of normal leukocytes.
- the first and second ranges may be predetermined numerical ranges based, for example, on the results of measuring and classifying leukocytes in a sample (e.g., peripheral blood) obtained from a healthy individual.
- the maximum SSC intensity of a leukocyte subpopulation refers to the highest SSC intensity among the cells classified into that subpopulation.
- the minimum SSC intensity of a leukocyte subpopulation refers to the lowest SSC intensity among the cells classified into that subpopulation.
- the statistical representative value of the SSC intensity of a leukocyte subpopulation is a value obtained from the SSC intensities of the cells classified into that subpopulation. Examples of representative values include the median, mean, mode, and centroid.
- the centroid of SSC intensity refers to the SSC intensity of the point (cell) located at the centroid of the subpopulation as displayed on the scattergram. The median is preferred as the representative value.
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate a predetermined region on the first scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes.
- a predetermined region is, for example, a region (also called "gate B") where the SFL-1 intensity is above a first threshold and the SSC intensity is within a first range.
- the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes.
- gate B is the region enclosed by the dashed line on the first scattergram. Within gate B, particles may appear that show an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold on the first scattergram and an SSC intensity within a first range.
- the arrow indicates the maximum SFL-1 intensity of the lymphocyte population of leukocytes as an example of the first threshold.
- a range is shown that is above the representative value of the SSC intensity of the lymphocyte population and below the representative value of the SSC intensity of the neutrophil population.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis ("first analysis") based on the difference in staining characteristics of the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics of the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the difference in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 17) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) by the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figure 18, described later) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) by the second fluorescent dye.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies cells based on a scattergram derived from a first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) (example in Figure 17) and a scattergram derived from a second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) (example in Figure 18).
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (second analysis) based on differences in a first component (DNA in the example in Figure 17) among multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (DNA in the example in Figure 17) into multiple populations according to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). In the example in Figure 17, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells with an SFL-1 higher than a first threshold and SSC within a first range as first leukocytes, and cells corresponding to an SFL-1 lower than the first threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- SFL-1 first fluorescence intensity
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate a predetermined region on the second scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as second leukocytes.
- a predetermined region is, for example, a region where the SFL-2 intensity is above a second threshold and the SSC intensity is within a second range (also called "gate A").
- the analysis unit 300 counts the detected second leukocytes.
- gate A is the region enclosed by the dashed line on the second scattergram. Within gate A, particles may appear that show an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold on the second scattergram and an SSC intensity within the second range.
- the arrow indicates the maximum SFL-2 intensity of the monocyte population of leukocytes as an example of the second threshold.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (third analysis) based on differences in the second component (RNA in the example in Figure 18) in multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with the second fluorescent dye for the second component (RNA in the example in Figure 18) into multiple groups according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2).
- the analysis unit 300 classifies cells with SFL-2 higher than the second threshold and SSC within the second range as second leukocytes, and cells corresponding to SFL-2 lower than the second threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- step S16 the analysis unit 300 generates information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the detection results of the first and second leukocytes.
- the detection result for the first leukocytes is, for example, the number of first leukocytes detected and counted in step S14.
- the detection result for the second leukocytes is, for example, the number of second leukocytes detected and counted in step S15.
- the analysis unit 300 determines whether the number of first leukocytes is above a third threshold.
- the analysis unit 300 also determines whether the number of second leukocytes is above a fourth threshold.
- the analysis unit 300 can generate information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase, including information indicating that the mechanism of increase of first leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic, and information indicating that the mechanism of increase of second leukocytes in the sample is reactive.
- information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase including information indicating that the mechanism of increase of first leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic, and information indicating that the mechanism of increase of second leukocytes in the sample is reactive.
- Condition 1 is, for example, a condition where the number of first white blood cells is equal to or greater than the third threshold, and the number of second white blood cells is less than the fourth threshold.
- Condition 2 is, for example, a condition where the number of first white blood cells is less than the third threshold, and the number of second white blood cells is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold.
- Condition 3 is, for example, a condition where the number of first white blood cells is less than the third threshold, and the number of second white blood cells is less than the fourth threshold.
- the analysis unit 300 determines whether the number of first white blood cells counted in step S14 and the number of second white blood cells counted in step S15 satisfy any of conditions 1 to 3.
- the analysis unit 300 When the number of first and second leukocytes satisfies condition 1, the analysis unit 300 generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic. The process then proceeds to step S8. In step S8, the analysis unit 300 outputs a flag "Malignant?" to the display unit 306 as information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes is neoplastic.
- the analysis unit 300 When the number of first and second leukocytes satisfies condition 2, the analysis unit 300 generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes in the sample is reactive. The process then proceeds to step S8. In step S8, the analysis unit 300 outputs a flag "Reactive?" to the display unit 306 as information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes is reactive.
- step S8 the analysis unit 300 does not output a flag regarding the mechanism of increase to the display unit 306. This indicates that the sample did not contain leukocytes resulting from either neoplastic or reactive mechanisms of increase, for example. It is also conceivable that the number of first white blood cells is above the third threshold and the number of second white blood cells is above the fourth threshold. In this case, for example, the analysis unit 300 may output a different flag to the display unit 306 than "Malignant?" and "Reactive?", or it may not output any flag to the display unit 306.
- the analysis unit 300 may output a flag to the display unit 306 indicating that some abnormality is suspected in the subject.
- the analysis unit 300 may output a flag to the display unit 306 indicating that the distinction of the mechanism of white blood cell increase was unclear (for example, "Unknown”).
- the analysis unit 300 may output both the "Malignant?" and "Reactive?" flags to the display unit 306.
- the third and fourth thresholds may be the same or different.
- the third and fourth thresholds can be determined as appropriate. For example, by accumulating optical information data obtained from measurements of samples from healthy individuals, samples containing leukocytes whose increase mechanism is neoplastic, and samples containing leukocytes whose increase mechanism is reactive, values can be set to distinguish between samples from healthy individuals and samples containing leukocytes resulting from either neoplastic or reactive increase mechanisms.
- the analysis unit 300 does not detect the second leukocyte, or does not use the detection result of the second leukocyte, but generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic, based on the detection result of the first leukocyte. For example, the analysis unit 300 determines whether the number of first leukocytes is above the third threshold. When the number of first leukocytes is above the third threshold, the analysis unit 300 generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic. The process then proceeds to step S8.
- step S8 the analysis unit 300 outputs a flag "Malignant?" to the display unit 306 as information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes is neoplastic.
- the analysis unit 300 does not generate information regarding the mechanism of increase in leukocytes.
- the process then proceeds to step S8, and the processor 301 does not output a flag related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase to the display unit 306.
- the analysis unit 300 does not detect first leukocytes, or does not use the detection result of first leukocytes, but generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes contained in the sample is reactive, based on the detection result of second leukocytes, as information regarding the mechanism of increase in leukocytes. For example, the analysis unit 300 determines whether the number of second leukocytes is above the fourth threshold. When the number of second leukocytes is above the fourth threshold, the analysis unit 300 generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes contained in the sample is reactive. The process then proceeds to step S8.
- step S8 the processor 301 outputs a flag "Reactive?" to the display unit 306 as information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes is reactive.
- the analysis unit 300 does not generate information regarding the mechanism of increase in leukocytes.
- the process then proceeds to step S8, and the processor 301 does not output a flag related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase to the display unit 306.
- the analysis unit 300 may provide information on leukocyte subpopulations in addition to information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase.
- Information on leukocyte subpopulations may be based on first fluorescence information (e.g., SFL-1 intensity) and scattered light information (e.g., SSC intensity).
- information on leukocyte subpopulations may be based on second fluorescence information (e.g., SFL-2 intensity) and scattered light information (e.g., SSC intensity).
- Information on leukocyte subpopulations may include, for example, information on the number of cells contained in each subpopulation of leukocytes. Such information may include, for example, the number of cells per unit volume (e.g., ⁇ L) for each subpopulation of leukocytes, or the ratio of the number of cells in each subpopulation to the total number of leukocytes.
- step S7 in Figure 12 an example of the analysis process in Embodiment 2 will be described with reference to Figure 20, but the method is not limited to this example.
- This analysis process enables the generation of information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase.
- lateral scattered light information is used as the scattered light information. More specifically, SSC intensity is used as the lateral scattered light information. SFL-1 intensity is used as the first fluorescence information, and SFL-2 intensity is used as the second fluorescence information.
- step S21 the analysis unit 300 determines the position of each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-1 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined positions of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a first scattergram.
- step S22 the analysis unit 300 determines the position of each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined positions of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a second scattergram.
- step S23 the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-1 intensity greater than the first threshold as first leukocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the first threshold is as described above.
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate gate B on the first scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the details of the detection of first leukocytes by gating are the same as those described in step S14 of Embodiment 1.
- step S24 the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold as secondary leukocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 also counts the detected secondary leukocytes.
- the second threshold is as described above.
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate gate A on the second scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as secondary leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected secondary leukocytes.
- the details of secondary leukocyte detection by gating are the same as those described in step S15 of Embodiment 1.
- step S25 the analysis unit 300 generates information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the detection results of first leukocytes and/or second leukocytes.
- the detection result for first leukocytes is, for example, the number of first leukocytes detected and counted in step S23.
- the detection result for second leukocytes is, for example, the number of second leukocytes detected and counted in step S24.
- Step S25 is the same as described for step S16 of Embodiment 1.
- step S7 in Figure 12 an example of the analysis process of Embodiment 3 will be described with reference to Figure 21, but the method is not limited to this example.
- This analysis process enables the classification of leukocytes into subpopulations on the second scattergram and the generation of information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase.
- lateral scattered light information is used as the scattered light information. More specifically, SSC intensity is used as the lateral scattered light information. SFL-1 intensity is used as the first fluorescence information, and SFL-2 intensity is used as the second fluorescence information.
- step S31 the analysis unit 300 determines the position of a point corresponding to each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined position of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a second scattergram.
- step S32 the analysis unit 300 classifies leukocytes into subpopulations from the particles in the measurement sample based on the determined position of each point. The details of leukocyte classification and counting are the same as those described in step S13.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (first analysis) based on the difference in staining characteristics of the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics of the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye. For example, the analysis unit 300 plots multiple cells stained according to differences in staining characteristics on a scattergram with the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye on the x-axis and the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye on the y-axis.
- SFL-1 first fluorescence intensity
- SFL-2 second fluorescence intensity
- the first and second leukocytes are also plotted on the scattergram in Figure 21.
- Each cell on the scattergram in Figure 21 is plotted at a position corresponding to the difference in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes.
- step S33 the analysis unit 300 determines the position of each particle on a plane with SFL-1 intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined position of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a third scattergram.
- each subpopulation of leukocytes such as Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo, appears at approximately the same or close proximity to each other. Therefore, in the third scattergram, clusters corresponding to each subpopulation of leukocytes are not displayed; instead, they are displayed as a group of leukocytes, as shown in Figure 22, for example.
- WBC refers to leukocytes.
- step S34 the analysis unit 300 detects first leukocytes based on the SFL-1 intensity of each particle. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold as first leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the first threshold is as described above.
- the analysis unit 300 can, for example, gate the region on the third scattergram where the SFL-1 intensity is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the region where the SFL-1 intensity is greater than or equal to a first threshold is, for example, the region enclosed by the dashed line on the third scattergram. Within this region enclosed by the dashed line, particles showing an SFL-1 intensity greater than the first threshold on the third scattergram may appear.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (second analysis) based on differences in a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 23) in multiple measured cells.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 23) into multiple groups according to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1).
- the analysis unit 300 classifies cells corresponding to SFL-1 levels higher than the first threshold as primary leukocytes, and cells corresponding to SFL-1 levels lower than the first threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- step S35 the analysis unit 300 detects secondary leukocytes based on the SFL-2 intensity of each particle. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold as secondary leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected secondary leukocytes.
- the second threshold is as described above.
- the analysis unit 300 can, for example, gate the region on the third scattergram where the SFL-2 intensity is greater than or equal to the second threshold, and detect particles appearing within that region as second leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected second leukocytes.
- the region where the SFL-2 intensity is greater than or equal to the second threshold is, for example, the region enclosed by the dashed line on the third scattergram. Within this region enclosed by the dashed line, particles showing an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold on the third scattergram may appear.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (third analysis) based on differences in the second component (RNA in the example of Figure 24) in multiple measured cells.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with the second fluorescent dye for the second component (RNA in the example of Figure 24) into multiple groups according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2).
- the analysis unit 300 classifies cells corresponding to SFL-2 levels higher than the second threshold as second leukocytes, and cells corresponding to SFL-2 levels lower than the second threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate a predetermined region on the third scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes.
- a predetermined region is a region (also called "gate D") where the SFL-1 intensity is above a first threshold and the SFL-2 intensity is below a predetermined threshold.
- the predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-2 intensity is, for example, a second threshold.
- the predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-2 intensity may also be, for example, a third threshold different from the second threshold.
- the third threshold is, for example, an SFL-2 intensity lower than the second threshold.
- the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on differences in a first component (DNA in this example) in multiple measured cells (second analysis) and an analysis based on differences in a second component (RNA in this example) in multiple measured cells (third analysis).
- the analysis unit 300 classifies cells appearing in the region (gate D) where the SFL-1 intensity is above a first threshold and the SFL-2 intensity is below a predetermined threshold as primary leukocytes, and classifies cells outside gate D as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, basophils, etc. (sometimes including secondary leukocytes).
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate a predetermined region on the third scattergram that is different from gate D, and detect particles appearing in that region as second leukocytes.
- a predetermined region is a region (also called "gate C") where the SFL-1 intensity is above a predetermined threshold and the SFL-2 intensity is higher than the second threshold.
- the predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-1 intensity is, for example, the first threshold.
- the predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-1 intensity may also be, for example, a fourth threshold different from the first threshold.
- the fourth threshold is, for example, an SFL-1 intensity lower than the first threshold.
- the analysis unit 300 counts the detected second leukocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on differences in a first component (DNA in this example) in multiple measured cells (second analysis) and an analysis based on differences in a second component (RNA in this example) in multiple measured cells (third analysis).
- the analysis unit 300 classifies cells appearing in the region (gate C) where the SFL-1 intensity is above a predetermined threshold and the SFL-2 intensity is higher than a second threshold as secondary leukocytes, and classifies cells outside gate C as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, basophils, etc. (sometimes including primary leukocytes).
- gate C is the region enclosed by the solid line on the third scattergram
- gate D is the region enclosed by the dashed line on the third scattergram.
- particles may appear that exhibit an SFL-1 intensity greater than a predetermined threshold and an SFL-2 intensity greater than a second threshold on the third scattergram.
- the predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-1 intensity is the same as in the example described above.
- particles may appear that exhibit an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold and an SFL-2 intensity less than or equal to a predetermined threshold on the third scattergram.
- the predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-2 intensity is the same as in the example described above.
- step S36 the analysis unit 300 generates information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the detection results of the first and second leukocytes.
- the detection result for the first leukocytes is, for example, the number of first leukocytes detected and counted in step S34.
- the detection result for the second leukocytes is, for example, the number of second leukocytes detected and counted in step S35.
- Step S36 is the same as described for step S16 of Embodiment 1.
- the analysis unit 300 may output information on subpopulations of leukocytes in addition to information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase.
- the information on subpopulations of leukocytes is as described above.
- step S7 in Figure 12 an example of the analysis process of Embodiment 4 will be described with reference to Figure 26, but the process is not limited to this example.
- This analysis process enables the generation of information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase.
- SFL-1 intensity is used as the first fluorescence information
- SFL-2 intensity is used as the second fluorescence information.
- step S41 the analysis unit 300 determines the position of the point corresponding to each particle on a plane with SFL-1 intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined position of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a third scattergram.
- step S42 the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-1 intensity greater than the first threshold as first leukocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the first threshold is as described above.
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate gate D on the third scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes.
- the details of the detection of first leukocytes by gating are the same as those described in step S34 of Embodiment 3.
- step S43 the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold as secondary leukocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 also counts the detected secondary leukocytes.
- the second threshold is as described above.
- the analysis unit 300 can also gate gate C on the third scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as secondary leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected secondary leukocytes.
- the details of secondary leukocyte detection by gating are the same as those described in step S35 of Embodiment 3.
- step S44 the analysis unit 300 generates information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the detection results of first leukocytes and/or second leukocytes.
- the detection result for first leukocytes is, for example, the number of first leukocytes detected and counted in step S42.
- the detection result for second leukocytes is, for example, the number of second leukocytes detected and counted in step S43.
- Step S44 is the same as described for step S16 of Embodiment 1.
- step S7 in Figure 12 an example of the analytical processing described in "Example 2 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above will be explained.
- the first fluorescence intensity also called “SFL-1 intensity”
- the second fluorescence intensity also called “SFL-2 intensity”
- a scattergram with SFL-1 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the “first scattergram.”
- a scattergram with SFL-2 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "second scattergram.”
- Figures 27 and 28 show examples of the first and second scattergrams in the analytical process described in "Example 2 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above.
- SFL-1 which corresponds to the first fluorescent dye whose binding ability to DNA is superior to its binding ability to RNA
- Figures of platelets containing DNA appear on the scattergram, but reticulocytes with little or no DNA appear as clear clusters on the scattergram.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (first analysis) based on the differences in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the differences in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the differences in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 27) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figure 28) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies the cells using a scattergram based on the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) (example in Figure 27) and a scattergram based on the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) (example in Figure 28).
- the analysis unit 300 performs a second analysis based on differences in a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 27) among multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 27) into multiple populations according to their first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). In the example of Figure 27, the analysis unit 300 detects platelets based on clusters of platelets stained with the first fluorescent dye that has the ability to bind to DNA, for example, in the scattergram of Figure 27. Reticulocytes (RETs), which have little or no DNA, do not appear in the scattergram of Figure 27. Thus, the analysis unit 300 classifies platelets and reticulocytes by the analysis exemplified in the scattergram of Figure 27.
- RETs Reticulocytes
- the analysis unit 300 performs a third analysis based on differences in a second component (RNA in the example of Figure 28) among multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a second fluorescent dye for a second component (RNA in the example of Figure 28) into multiple populations according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the example of Figure 28, the analysis unit 300 detects reticulocytes based on clusters of reticulocytes stained with the second fluorescent dye that has RNA-binding ability in the scattergram of Figure 28. Platelets, which do not readily bind to the second fluorescent dye that has RNA-binding ability, appear only faintly in the scattergram of Figure 28 and do not overlap with the RET cluster. Thus, the analysis unit 300 classifies platelets and reticulocytes by the analysis exemplified in the scattergram of Figure 28.
- SFL-2 second fluorescence intensity
- step S7 in Figure 12 an example of the analytical processing described in "Example 3 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above will be explained.
- the first fluorescence intensity also called “SFL-1 intensity”
- the second fluorescence intensity also called “SFL-2 intensity”
- a scattergram with SFL-1 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the “first scattergram.”
- a scattergram with SFL-2 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "second scattergram.”
- Figures 29, 30, and 31 show examples of the first and second scattergrams in the analytical process described in "Example 3 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above.
- Figure 29 shows the first scattergram with SFL-1, which corresponds to the first fluorescent dye whose nucleolus binding ability is superior to its RNA binding ability, on the vertical axis.
- SFL-1 corresponds to the first fluorescent dye whose nucleolus binding ability is superior to its RNA binding ability, on the vertical axis.
- blast cells and promyelocytes which contain nucleoli, appear at higher values than leukocytes. Since blast cells and promyelocytes contain different amounts of nucleoli, the amount of the first fluorescent dye that binds to the nucleoli of blast cells is different from the amount that binds to the nucleoli of promyelocytes.
- the second scattergram of a sample containing blast cells and other immature granulocytes (promyelocytes), as shown in Figure 31, clusters of blast cells and other immature granulocytes appear in regions overlapping with some of the mature leukocyte clusters, and in such clusters, it may be impossible to distinguish between blast cells and promyelocytes.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes have different staining and fluorescence properties for cells. By using such fluorescent dyes, as shown in Figure 29, it becomes possible to distinguish and analyze blast cells and promyelocytes using a single measurement channel.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (first analysis) based on the difference in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the difference in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 29) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figures 30 and 31) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye.
- first group the group of cells shown in Figure 29
- SFL-1 first fluorescence intensity
- SFL-2 the group of cells shown in Figures 30 and 31
- the analysis unit 300 classifies cells using the scattergram shown in Figure 30 to classify mature white blood cells such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils, and for samples in which at least one of blast cells and promyelocytes appears, it classifies cells using the scattergram shown in Figure 29 to classify at least one of the blast cells and promyelocytes from mature white blood cells.
- the analysis unit 300 performs a second analysis based on differences in a first component (nucleolus in the example in Figure 29) in multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (nucleolus in the example in Figure 29) into multiple populations according to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). In the example in Figure 29, the analysis unit 300 classifies blast cells and promyelocytes based on the first fluorescence intensity, which reflects the difference in nucleolus between blast cells and promyelocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 classifies clusters of blast cells and promyelocytes based on the fact that blast cells, which contain more nucleolus than promyelocytes, bind more of the first fluorescent dye, and their first fluorescence intensity is higher than that of promyelocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (third analysis) based on differences in a second component (RNA in the examples of Figures 30 and 31) in multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a second fluorescent dye for a second component (RNA in the examples of Figures 30 and 31) into multiple populations according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2).
- the analysis unit 300 classifies mature leukocytes based on differences in RNA among mature leukocytes such as lymphocytes and monocytes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies mature leukocytes based on differences in the second fluorescence intensity that reflect differences in RNA among mature leukocytes.
- step S7 in Figure 12 an example of the analytical processing described in "Example 4 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above will be explained.
- the first fluorescence intensity also called “SFL-1 intensity”
- the second fluorescence intensity also called “SFL-2 intensity”
- a scattergram with SFL-1 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the “first scattergram.”
- a scattergram with SFL-2 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "second scattergram.”
- Figures 32 and 33 show examples of the first and second scattergrams when using example 4 of the fluorescent dye.
- SFL-1 is plotted on the vertical axis, corresponding to the first fluorescent dye whose binding ability to granules in cells (e.g., basophilic granules) is superior to its binding ability to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), Baso appears on the higher SFL-1 side.
- Figure 32 is an example where immature granulocytes (IG) are present in the sample. In the first scattergram of Figure 32, Baso clusters appear on the higher SFL-1 side than immature granulocyte clusters.
- IG immature granulocytes
- the first fluorescent dye has a high binding ability to granules of Baso (e.g., basophilic granules), Baso clusters appear on the higher SFL-1 side than immature granulocyte clusters. Therefore, differentiation between Baso and immature granulocytes becomes possible.
- Baso e.g., basophilic granules
- the second fluorescent dye whose DNA binding ability is superior to its binding ability to granules in cells, plotted on the horizontal axis, nucleated red blood cells, Baso, and other white blood cells can be differentiated.
- the first and second fluorescent dyes have different staining and fluorescence properties for cells.
- the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (first analysis) based on the differences in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the differences in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the differences in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 32) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figure 33, described later) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye.
- first group the group of cells shown in Figure 32
- SFL-1 first fluorescence intensity
- SFL-2 the group of cells shown in Figure 33, described later
- the analysis unit 300 classifies the cells using a scattergram based on the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) (example in Figure 32) and a scattergram based on the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) (example in Figure 33).
- the analysis unit 300 performs a second analysis based on differences in the first component (granules in the example of Figure 32) among the measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with the first fluorescent dye for the first component (granules in the example of Figure 32) into multiple groups according to their first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1).
- the first fluorescent dye has a high binding affinity to basophilic granules, such as those contained in Baso, among other granules.
- the first fluorescent dye also has binding affinity to granules contained in immature granulocytes, for example, but its binding affinity is lower than that to basophilic granules contained in Baso. Therefore, the SFL-1 of Baso clusters will be higher than that of immature granulocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 performs a third analysis based on differences in a second component (DNA in the example of Figure 33) among the measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a second fluorescent dye for a second component (DNA in the example of Figure 33) into multiple groups according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the example of Figure 33, the analysis unit 300 classifies Baso, non-Baso mature leukocytes, and nucleated erythrocytes based on SFL-2.
- the analysis unit 300 outputs the analysis results to the display unit 306 in step S8 and terminates the process.
- the analysis unit 300 provides, for example, information regarding the clinical condition of the subject as analysis results.
- FIGs 34A and 34B an example of the analysis results displayed on the display unit 306 will be described, but it is not limited to this example.
- the display unit 306 displays the analysis results screen 80.
- the analysis results screen 80 includes a measurement item display area 81, a research item display area 82, a flag display area 83, and a scattergram display area 84.
- the measurement item display area 81 displays information regarding normal white blood cells and the number of cells included in each subpopulation.
- WBC white blood cells
- NUT refers to the neutrophil population
- LYMPH lymphocyte population
- MONO refers to the monocyte population
- EO refers to the eosinophil population
- BASO refers to the basophil population.
- # indicates the number of cells per unit volume
- % indicates the ratio of the number of cells in each subpopulation to the total number of white blood cells.
- the research item display area 82 displays supplementary information such as the number and characteristics of cells.
- the flag display area 83 displays information regarding the mechanism of white blood cell increase. The flags displayed in the flag display area 83 are, for example, information suggesting the clinical condition of the subject.
- the scattergram display area 84 displays the scattergram created during the analysis process. Referring to Figure 34A, the flag display area 83 displays the flag "Malignant?" to indicate that the mechanism of white blood cell increase in the sample is neoplastic. The first scattergram is also displayed in the scattergram display area 84. Referring to Figure 34B, the flag display area 83 displays the flag "Reactive?" to indicate that the mechanism of white blood cell increase in the sample is reactive. The second scattergram is also displayed in the scattergram display area 84.
- the analysis results displayed on the display unit 306 may include results related to RET and PLT.
- the counting results for RET and PLT, and a scattergram may be displayed.
- a flag corresponding to that abnormality may be displayed in the flag display area 83.
- RE measurement results may, for example, be related to the suspected presence of acute leukemia or aplastic anemia in the subject.
- PLT measurement results may, for example, be related to the subject's hemostatic ability or bleeding risk.
- the analysis results displayed on the display unit 306 may include results regarding blast cells and promyelocytes.
- the analysis unit 300 can display a flag on the display unit 306 corresponding to the detection of blast cells and a flag corresponding to the detection of promyelocytes.
- a scattergram of blast cells and promyelocytes may be displayed on the display unit 306.
- the displayed flags may, for example, indicate information suggesting the subject's clinical condition.
- Measurement results regarding blast cells and promyelocytes are related, for example, to the suspected leukemia of the subject. Prompt treatment can affect the prognosis of promyelocyte-associated leukemia (acute promyelocytic leukemia). Effective medications exist for acute promyelocytic leukemia. Therefore, if blast cells and promyelocytes can be differentiated by blood sample testing, it becomes possible to distinguish between subjects requiring immediate treatment and those with less urgent need for treatment.
- the analysis results displayed on the display unit 306 may include results regarding the differentiation between Baso and immature granulocytes.
- the Baso counting result may be displayed on the display unit 306. Since the analysis unit 300 can differentiate between Baso and immature granulocytes even when they appear in the sample, it is possible to display an accurate Baso counting result on the display unit 306, excluding the influence of immature granulocytes.
- a scattergram reflecting the differentiation result between Baso and immature granulocytes may be displayed on the display unit 306.
- the displayed flags may, for example, indicate information suggesting the clinical condition of the subject.
- Chronic myeloid leukemia is a disease associated with abnormal increases in Baso. If Baso and immature granulocytes can be distinguished and each can be accurately counted, abnormal increases in Baso can be judged more accurately.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- Food Science & Technology (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Ecology (AREA)
- Investigating Or Analysing Biological Materials (AREA)
- Investigating, Analyzing Materials By Fluorescence Or Luminescence (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本発明は、検体中の細胞を分析するための測定装置に関する。 This invention relates to a measuring device for analyzing cells in a sample.
血液や体腔液などのように血球を含む検体の分析では、白血球は、例えば、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球及び好塩基球の5つの亜集団に分類される。検体から被検者の健康状態や疾患に関連しうる細胞を検出することは、被検者を診断する上で有用である。特許文献1には、血液検体から測定試料を調製し、白血球計数や白血球分類などの検査項目を測定し、その測定結果に応じて、他の測定試料を調製して追加の測定を行うことが記載されている。 In the analysis of specimens containing blood cells, such as blood and body fluids, white blood cells are classified into five subgroups: lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils. Detecting cells that may be related to a subject's health status or disease from a specimen is useful for diagnosing the subject. Patent Document 1 describes preparing a measurement sample from a blood specimen, measuring test items such as white blood cell count and white blood cell classification, and then preparing other measurement samples and performing additional measurements based on the measurement results.
しかしながら、所定の検査項目を得るための測定を実行した後に、新たな測定試料を調製して追加の測定を実行することによる時間及びコストの増加が課題となる。よって、本発明は、新たな測定試料を調製して追加の測定を行うことを低減可能な測定装置を提供することを目的とする。 However, a challenge arises from the increased time and cost associated with preparing new measurement samples and performing additional measurements after the initial measurements to obtain the predetermined test items. Therefore, the present invention aims to provide a measuring device that can reduce the need to prepare new measurement samples and perform additional measurements.
本発明者らは、上記の課題を解決するために鋭意検討した結果、検体中の細胞に対する染色特性、及び蛍光特性が互いに異なる蛍光色素を用いることにより、蛍光色素の特性に応じた成分を含む細胞を分類できることを見出し、本発明を完成した。すなわち、本発明は、被検者から採取された検体に含まれる細胞を分析するための測定装置であって、細胞を電気的に測定する電気式測定部と、細胞を光学的に測定する第1光学式測定部と、検体に含まれる血色素を光学的に測定する第2光学式測定部と、電気式測定部、第1光学式測定部、及び、第2光学式測定部の少なくとも1つによる測定のための測定試料を調製する試料調製部と、測定試料の測定結果を提供する分析部と、を含み、試料調製部は、(1)赤血球数、白血球数、血色素量、ヘマトクリット値、平均赤血球容積、平均赤血球血色素量、平均赤血球血色素濃度、及び、血小板数を含む第1測定項目、(2)白血球の形態分類に関する第2測定項目、及び、(3)第1及び第2測定項目とは異なる第3測定項目、に対応する複数のチャンバと、測定試料の調製に用いられる蛍光色素を含む試薬を収容する複数の試薬容器と、複数のチャンバから第1光学式測定部に測定試料を送るための流路と、を含み、試料調製部は、第1測定項目、第2測定項目、又は、第3測定項目、の少なくとも1つの測定指示を含む測定オーダーに応じて、測定指示に対応する少なくとも1つのチャンバと、少なくとも1つのチャンバに対応する少なくとも1つの試薬容器とを用いて測定試料を調製し、試料調製部は、測定指示に対応する少なくとも1つのチャンバにおいて、細胞に対する染色特性、及び、蛍光特性が互いに異なる第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素と、検体とを混合して測定試料を調製し、第1光学式測定部は、細胞の第1の成分に対する染色特性を有する第1蛍光色素から生じた第1蛍光信号、及び、細胞の第2の成分に対する染色特性を有する第2蛍光色素から生じた第2蛍光信号、の少なくとも一つを含む光学的信号を測定し、分析部は、第1及び第2蛍光信号を含む光学的信号を参照し、(A)第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に基づく第1分析、(B)測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分に関する違いに基づく第2分析、及び、(C)測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分に関する違いに対応する第3分析、を実行することで、測定された細胞を分類する、測定装置を要旨とするものである。 The present inventors, after diligent research to solve the above problems, discovered that by using fluorescent dyes with different staining and fluorescence properties for cells in a sample, cells containing components according to the properties of the fluorescent dye can be classified, and thus completed the present invention. That is, the present invention is a measuring device for analyzing cells contained in a sample taken from a subject, comprising: an electrical measuring unit for electrically measuring cells; a first optical measuring unit for optically measuring cells; a second optical measuring unit for optically measuring hemoglobin contained in the sample; a sample preparation unit for preparing a measurement sample for measurement by at least one of the electrical measuring unit, the first optical measuring unit, and the second optical measuring unit; and an analysis unit for providing the measurement results of the measurement sample, wherein the sample preparation unit measures (1) red blood cell count, white blood cell count, hemoglobin amount, hematocrit value, mean red blood cell count. The sample preparation unit includes a plurality of chambers corresponding to a first measurement item including blood cell volume, mean corpuscular hemoglobin, mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration, and platelet count; a second measurement item relating to the morphological classification of leukocytes; and a third measurement item different from the first and second measurement items; a plurality of reagent containers containing reagents including fluorescent dyes used for preparing the measurement sample; and a flow path for sending the measurement sample from the plurality of chambers to the first optical measurement unit. The sample preparation unit responds to a measurement order that includes a measurement instruction for at least one of the first measurement item, the second measurement item, or the third measurement item. The first optical measurement unit prepares a measurement sample using at least one chamber corresponding to a measurement instruction and at least one reagent container corresponding to at least one chamber. The sample preparation unit prepares a measurement sample by mixing a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye, which have different staining and fluorescence properties for cells, with the sample in at least one chamber corresponding to a measurement instruction. The first optical measurement unit uses a first fluorescence signal generated from a first fluorescent dye having staining properties for a first component of a cell, and a second fluorescent dye having staining properties for a second component of a cell. The device essentially measures an optical signal containing at least one of the following: a first fluorescence signal and a second fluorescence signal. The analysis unit then refers to the optical signal containing the first and second fluorescence signals and performs the following analyses to classify the measured cells: (A) a first analysis based on the differences in staining characteristics and fluorescence characteristics of the first and second fluorescence dyes; (B) a second analysis based on the differences in the first component in the measured cells; and (C) a third analysis corresponding to the differences in the second component in the measured cells.
本発明によれば、新たな測定試料を調製して追加の測定を行うことを低減可能な測定装置が提供される。 According to the present invention, a measuring device is provided that can reduce the need to prepare new measurement samples and perform additional measurements.
図1を参照して、測定装置の構成の一例について説明する。測定装置500は、例えば、検出部を含む測定ユニット400と、分析部である分析ユニット300とを備える。分析ユニット300は、例えば、測定対象となる検体を分析するためのソフトウェアが組み込まれたパーソナルコンピュータである。測定ユニット400は、測定試料の調製及び測定を行うためのユニットであり、フローサイトメータを含む。分析ユニット300と測定ユニット400とは、所定のインターフェース(例えば、USB(Universal Serial Bus)、無線LAN(Local Area Network)、有線LAN、Bluetooth、等)で接続される。分析ユニット300は、測定ユニット400の動作制御も実行する。測定装置500は、測定ユニット400内に分析ユニット300が設けられた構成であってもよい。 Referring to Figure 1, an example of the configuration of the measuring device will be described. The measuring device 500 comprises, for example, a measuring unit 400 including a detection unit, and an analysis unit 300 which is an analysis unit. The analysis unit 300 is, for example, a personal computer with software for analyzing the sample to be measured. The measuring unit 400 is a unit for preparing and measuring the sample, and includes a flow cytometer. The analysis unit 300 and the measuring unit 400 are connected by a predetermined interface (e.g., USB (Universal Serial Bus), wireless LAN (Local Area Network), wired LAN, Bluetooth, etc.). The analysis unit 300 also performs operation control of the measuring unit 400. The measuring device 500 may also have a configuration in which the analysis unit 300 is provided within the measuring unit 400.
測定ユニット400は、検体と試薬とを混合して測定試料を調製する。測定試料の調製には、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素を含む試薬(「染色試薬」とも呼ぶ)が用いられる。測定試料の調製には、赤血球を溶解可能な界面活性剤を含む試薬(「溶血試薬」とも呼ぶ)をさらに用いることが好ましい。測定試料中の粒子は、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素によって染色される。 The measurement unit 400 prepares the measurement sample by mixing the sample and reagents. A reagent containing a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye (also called a "staining reagent") is used to prepare the measurement sample. Preferably, a reagent containing a surfactant capable of dissolving red blood cells (also called a "hemolytic reagent") is further used to prepare the measurement sample. The particles in the measurement sample are stained by the first and second fluorescent dyes.
第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素は、細胞に対する染色特性、及び、蛍光特性が互いに異なる色素である。例えば、第1蛍光色素が結合する第1の成分と、第2蛍光色素が結合する第2の成分は異なる。第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素は、例えば、互いに異なる波長域に蛍光発光極大を有する。蛍光発光極大は、蛍光色素が最も高い蛍光強度の光を励起するときの波長(ピーク波長)である。また、例えば、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素は、互いに異なる波長域に極大吸収を有する。すなわち、第2蛍光色素は、第1蛍光色素からの蛍光とは区別して検出可能な波長の蛍光を放出する蛍光色素であり得る。 The first and second fluorescent dyes are dyes with different staining and fluorescence properties for cells. For example, the first component to which the first fluorescent dye binds and the second component to which the second fluorescent dye binds are different. The first and second fluorescent dyes, for example, have fluorescence emission maxima in different wavelength ranges. The fluorescence emission maxima is the wavelength (peak wavelength) at which the fluorescent dye is excited by light with the highest fluorescence intensity. Furthermore, for example, the first and second fluorescent dyes have maximum absorption maxima in different wavelength ranges. That is, the second fluorescent dye may emit fluorescence at a wavelength that can be detected separately from the fluorescence from the first fluorescent dye.
(蛍光色素の例1)
第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素は、例えば、細胞中の成分である核酸(例えば、DNA、RNA)に対する結合能を有する色素である。第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素に起因して得られる蛍光信号によって、健常な被検者よりも白血球数が多い被検者の検体における白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性であるか又は反応性であるかを弁別できる。第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素のいずれかが他方よりもDNAに対して高い結合能を有し、RNAへの結合能はその逆となるように、第1及び第2蛍光色素が選ばれる。例えば、(1)第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素はDNAに対する結合能が互いに異なり、(2)第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素はRNAに対する結合能が互いに異なり、(3)第1蛍光色素はDNAへの結合能とRNAへの結合能が異なり、かつ、(4)第2蛍光色素はDNAへの結合能とRNAへの結合能が異なる、ように第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素が選ばれる。このような蛍光色素が選ばれることで、例えば、DNA量が通常よりも多い白血球を含む検体(すなわち、腫瘍性の増加機序で白血球が増加している疑いのある検体)では、第1蛍光色素に対応する蛍光信号が第2蛍光色素に対応する蛍光信号よりも多く得られる。一方、例えば、RNA量が通常よりも多い白血球を含む検体(すなわち、反応性の増加機序で白血球が増加している疑いのある検体)では、第2蛍光色素に対応する蛍光信号が第1蛍光色素に対応する蛍光信号よりも多く得られる。これによって、健常な被検者よりも白血球数が多い被検者の検体における白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性であるか又は反応性であるかの弁別が可能になる。
(Example 1 of fluorescent dyes)
The first and second fluorescent dyes are, for example, dyes that have the ability to bind to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), which are components of cells. The fluorescence signals obtained from the first and second fluorescent dyes can be used to distinguish whether the mechanism of leukocyte increase in a sample from a subject with a higher leukocyte count than a healthy subject is neoplastic or reactive. The first and second fluorescent dyes are selected such that one of them has a higher binding ability to DNA than the other, and the opposite is true for its binding ability to RNA. For example, the first and second fluorescent dyes are selected such that (1) the first and second fluorescent dyes have different binding abilities to DNA, (2) the first and second fluorescent dyes have different binding abilities to RNA, (3) the first fluorescent dye has different binding abilities to DNA and RNA, and (4) the second fluorescent dye has different binding abilities to DNA and RNA. By selecting such fluorescent dyes, for example, in a sample containing leukocytes with a higher-than-normal amount of DNA (i.e., a sample suspected of having increased leukocytes due to a neoplastic mechanism), the fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye will be greater than the fluorescence signal corresponding to the second fluorescent dye. On the other hand, for example, in a sample containing leukocytes with a higher-than-normal amount of RNA (i.e., a sample suspected of having increased leukocytes due to a reactive mechanism), the fluorescence signal corresponding to the second fluorescent dye will be greater than the fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye. This makes it possible to distinguish whether the mechanism of leukocyte increase in a sample from a subject with a higher leukocyte count than a healthy subject is neoplastic or reactive.
例えば、第1蛍光色素は反応性増加の白血球に対してよりも腫瘍性増加の白血球に対して高い染色能を有し、第2蛍光色素は腫瘍性増加の白血球に対してよりも反応性増加の白血球に対して高い染色能を有する。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、DNAに対する特異的な結合能を有するが、RNAに対する結合能は第2蛍光色素よりも弱い。第2蛍光色素は、例えば、RNAに対する結合能が第1蛍光色素よりも強い。第1蛍光色素がDNAに対する特異的な結合能を示す要因は、例えば、色素の構造である。例えば、第1蛍光色素は、DNAにおける核酸の二本鎖構造における間隙に入り込みやすい構造を有しており、DNAに対して特異的な結合能を有する。第1及び第2蛍光色素は、例えば、核酸に結合すると蛍光強度が大きくなる特性を有する。例えば、第1蛍光色素は、DNAに結合したときの蛍光強度と、DNAに結合していないときの蛍光強度との差は、約10倍程度もしくはそれ以上となる。上述のように、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素は共に核酸に対する結合能を有するが、第1蛍光色素は、第2蛍光色素よりもDNAに対する結合能が高く、第2蛍光色素よりもRNAに対する結合能が低い。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、400nm以上490nm以下の波波長域の光を吸収することにより励起されて蛍光を発する色素である。第2蛍光色素は、例えば、極大吸収を610nm以上750nm以下の波長域の光を吸収することにより励起されて蛍光を発する色素である。 For example, the first fluorescent dye has higher staining ability for neoplastic leukocytes than for neoplastic leukocytes, and the second fluorescent dye has higher staining ability for neoplastic leukocytes than for neoplastic leukocytes. The first fluorescent dye has, for example, specific binding ability to DNA, but weaker binding ability to RNA than the second fluorescent dye. The second fluorescent dye has, for example, stronger binding ability to RNA than the first fluorescent dye. The reason the first fluorescent dye exhibits specific binding ability to DNA is, for example, the structure of the dye. For example, the first fluorescent dye has a structure that easily penetrates the gaps in the double-stranded structure of nucleic acids in DNA, and thus has specific binding ability to DNA. The first and second fluorescent dyes have, for example, the property that their fluorescence intensity increases when they bind to nucleic acids. For example, the difference in fluorescence intensity of the first fluorescent dye when bound to DNA and when not bound to DNA is about 10 times or more. As described above, both the first and second fluorescent dyes have the ability to bind to nucleic acids, but the first fluorescent dye has a higher binding ability to DNA and a lower binding ability to RNA than the second fluorescent dye. The first fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that emits fluorescence when excited by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 490 nm. The second fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that emits fluorescence when excited by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 610 nm to 750 nm, where its maximum absorption occurs.
(蛍光色素の例2)
細胞中の成分である核酸(例えば、DNA、RNA)に対する結合能を有する第1及び第2蛍光色素の用途として、例えば、網赤血球(Reticulocyte、本明細書で「RET」と呼ぶことがある)と、血小板(Platelet、本明細書で「PLT」と呼ぶことがある)の測定もある。例えば、DNAへの結合能がRNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素と、RNAへの結合能がDNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素と、を用いて検体中の細胞を染色する。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、網赤血球への結合能に比べて、DNAを有する血小板に対して高い結合能を有する。第2蛍光色素は、例えば、DNAを有する血小板への結合能に比べて、RNAを有するがDNAは有さない網赤血球に対して高い結合能を有する。第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素は、蛍光特性も互いに異なる。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、400nm以上490nm以下の波波長域の光を吸収することにより励起されて蛍光を発する色素である。第2蛍光色素は、例えば、極大吸収を610nm以上750nm以下の波長域の光を吸収することにより励起されて蛍光を発する色素である。このような第1及び第2蛍光色素と検体とを混合して測定試料を調製し、FCM検出部460で光学的信号を取得することで、RETのための測定動作とPLTのための測定動作とを分けて実行することなく、網赤血球と血小板とを測定できる。例えば、RETの減少に基づき、被検者が急性白血病や再生不良性貧血を罹患している疑いが判断される。また、PLTの測定結果に応じて、被検者の止血能や出血リスクが判断される。
(Example 2 of fluorescent dyes)
One application of the first and second fluorescent dyes, which have the ability to bind to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), which are components of cells, is the measurement of reticulocytes (sometimes referred to as "RET" herein) and platelets (sometimes referred to as "PLT" herein). For example, cells in a sample are stained using a first fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to DNA is superior to its ability to bind to RNA, and a second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to RNA is superior to its ability to bind to DNA. The first fluorescent dye has, for example, a higher binding ability to platelets containing DNA compared to its binding ability to reticulocytes. The second fluorescent dye has, for example, a higher binding ability to reticulocytes containing RNA but not DNA compared to its binding ability to platelets containing DNA. The first and second fluorescent dyes also have different fluorescence properties. The first fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 490 nm. The second fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence when it absorbs light in the wavelength range of 610 nm to 750 nm, where its maximum absorption occurs. By mixing such first and second fluorescent dyes with the sample to prepare a measurement sample and acquiring an optical signal with the FCM detection unit 460, reticulocytes and platelets can be measured without having to perform separate measurement operations for RET and PLT. For example, a decrease in RET may indicate that the subject is suspected of having acute leukemia or aplastic anemia. In addition, the subject's hemostatic ability and bleeding risk can be determined based on the PLT measurement results.
(蛍光色素の例3)
例えば、細胞中の成分である核小体に結合可能な第1蛍光色素と、細胞中の成分であるRNAに結合可能な第2蛍光色素とを用いることで、白血球分類と、芽球及び前骨髄球の弁別とを行うことが可能となる。例えば、核小体への結合能がRNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素と、RNAへの結合能が核小体に対する結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素と、を用いて検体中の細胞を染色する。白血球分類の対象となるリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球等の成熟した白血球は、核小体を有さない。そのため、成熟した白血球に対する第1蛍光色素の結合能は、第2蛍光色素よりも低くなる。芽球及び前骨髄球は、核小体を有する。芽球及び前骨髄球の核小体の量はそれぞれ異なっている。よって、芽球及び前骨髄球に結合する第1蛍光色素の量は、芽球及び前骨髄球それぞれの核小体の量に依存する。結合した第1蛍光色素の量の違いが、蛍光強度の違いとして測定される。そのため、第1蛍光色素の蛍光強度の違いに少なくとも基づく分析により、芽球及び前骨髄球の弁別が可能となる。第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素は、蛍光特性も互いに異なる。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、400nm以上490nm以下の波波長域の光を吸収することにより励起されて蛍光を発する色素である。第2蛍光色素は、例えば、極大吸収を610nm以上750nm以下の波長域の光を吸収することにより励起されて蛍光を発する色素である。白血球分類のための測定試料の調製において、第2蛍光色素に加えて第1蛍光色素も用いて測定試料を調製し、FCM検出部460で光学的信号を取得することで、白血球分類のための測定動作と、芽球及び前骨髄球の弁別のための測定動作とを分けて実行することなく、測定を実行することが可能となる。芽球及び前骨髄球に関する検査結果は、例えば、被検者の白血病の疑いを判断するために用いられる。前骨髄球に関連する白血病(急性前骨髄球性白血病)は、早急な治療が予後に影響しうる。急性前骨髄球性白血病に対しては、有効な治療薬がある。よって、血液検体の検査によって、芽球と前骨髄球との弁別ができれば、早急な治療を要する被検者と早急な治療の必要性は低い被検者の弁別が可能となる。
(Example 3 of fluorescent dyes)
For example, by using a first fluorescent dye that can bind to the nucleolus, a component of cells, and a second fluorescent dye that can bind to RNA, another component of cells, it becomes possible to classify leukocytes and differentiate between blast cells and promyelocytes. For instance, cells in a sample are stained using a first fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to the nucleolus is greater than its ability to bind to RNA, and a second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to RNA is greater than its ability to bind to the nucleolus. Mature leukocytes, such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils, which are the target of leukocyte classification, do not possess nucleoli. Therefore, the binding ability of the first fluorescent dye to mature leukocytes is lower than that of the second fluorescent dye. Blast cells and promyelocytes possess nucleoli. The amount of nucleoli in blast cells and promyelocytes differs. Therefore, the amount of the first fluorescent dye that binds to blast cells and promyelocytes depends on the amount of nucleoli in each of them. The difference in the amount of bound first fluorescent dye is measured as a difference in fluorescence intensity. Therefore, differentiation between blast cells and promyelocytes becomes possible through analysis based at least on the difference in fluorescence intensity of the first fluorescent dye. The first and second fluorescent dyes also have different fluorescence properties. The first fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 490 nm. The second fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 610 nm to 750 nm at its maximum absorption. In preparing a sample for leukocyte classification, by preparing the sample using both the first and second fluorescent dyes and acquiring the optical signal with the FCM detection unit 460, it becomes possible to perform the measurement without separating the measurement operation for leukocyte classification and the measurement operation for differentiation between blast cells and promyelocytes. The test results regarding blast cells and promyelocytes can be used, for example, to determine whether a subject is suspected of having leukemia. Prompt treatment can significantly impact the prognosis of leukemia associated with promyelocytic cells (acute promyelocytic leukemia). Effective medications exist for acute promyelocytic leukemia. Therefore, if blood sample testing can differentiate between blast cells and promyelocytic cells, it becomes possible to distinguish between patients requiring immediate treatment and those who do not.
(蛍光色素の例4)
例えば、細胞中の成分である顆粒に結合可能な第1蛍光色素と、細胞中の成分であるDNAに結合可能な第2蛍光色素とを用いることで、白血球の一形態である好塩基球(Basophil、本明細書において「Baso」と呼ぶことがある)と幼若顆粒球の弁別が可能となる。例えば、細胞中の顆粒への結合能が核酸(例えば、DNA、RNA)に対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素と、DNAに対する結合能が、細胞中の顆粒への結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素とを用いることで、検体中に幼若顆粒球が出現している場合でもBasoと幼若顆粒球を弁別でき、Basoを正確に測定することが可能となる。白血球分類において、Basoとその他の白血球、及び、有核赤血球を測定するための試薬が用いられる場合がある。この場合、例えば、有核赤血球の染色のため、DNAを染色可能な蛍光色素を用いた測定が行われる。Basoとその他の白血球は、散乱光に基づいて分類される。しかし、検体に幼若顆粒球が存在していると、DNAを染色可能な蛍光色素のみによる測定では、Basoと幼若顆粒球との区別が難しい場合があった。DNAを染色可能な第2蛍光色素に加え、Basoに含まれる顆粒(例えば、好塩基性顆粒)を染色可能な第1蛍光色素を用いることで、Basoと幼若顆粒球の区別が可能となる。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、Basoに含まれる顆粒に特異的に結合可能である。このような第1蛍光色素を用いることで、例えば、第1蛍光色素がBasoを染色するが、幼若顆粒球はほぼ染色されないように測定試料を調製可能となる。第1蛍光色素に対応する蛍光信号の分析により、幼若顆粒球が存在する検体であっても、第1蛍光色素で染色されたBasoを幼若顆粒球と区別して特定することが可能となる。第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素は、蛍光特性も互いに異なる。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、400nm以上490nm以下の波波長域の光を吸収することにより励起されて蛍光を発する色素である。第2蛍光色素は、例えば、極大吸収を610nm以上750nm以下の波長域の光を吸収することにより励起されて蛍光を発する色素である。Basoとその他の白血球、及び、有核赤血球の測定において、第2蛍光色素に加えて第1蛍光色素も用いて測定試料を調製し、FCM検出部460で光学的信号を取得することで、幼若顆粒球が存在する検体であっても、Basoと幼若顆粒球とを区別するための再測定を実行することなく、正確にBasoを測定することが可能となる。Basoの異常増加に関連する疾患に、慢性骨髄性白血病がある。Basoと幼若顆粒球とを区別し、各々を正確に計数できれば、Basoの異常増加をより正確に判断可能となる。
(Example 4 of fluorescent dyes)
For example, by using a first fluorescent dye capable of binding to granules, which are components of cells, and a second fluorescent dye capable of binding to DNA, which is also a component of cells, it becomes possible to differentiate between basophils (sometimes referred to as "Baso" in this specification), a form of white blood cell, and immature granulocytes. For example, by using a first fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to granules in cells is more dominant than its ability to bind to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), and a second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to DNA is more dominant than its ability to bind to granules in cells, it becomes possible to differentiate between Baso and immature granulocytes even when immature granulocytes are present in the sample, and to accurately measure Baso. In white blood cell classification, reagents may be used to measure Baso, other white blood cells, and nucleated red blood cells. In this case, for example, to stain nucleated red blood cells, measurements are performed using a fluorescent dye capable of staining DNA. Baso and other white blood cells are classified based on scattered light. However, when immature granulocytes are present in a sample, it can be difficult to distinguish between baso and immature granulocytes using only a fluorescent dye capable of staining DNA. By using a first fluorescent dye capable of staining granules contained in baso (e.g., basophilic granules) in addition to a second fluorescent dye capable of staining DNA, it becomes possible to distinguish between baso and immature granulocytes. The first fluorescent dye can specifically bind to granules contained in baso, for example. By using such a first fluorescent dye, it becomes possible to prepare a sample so that, for example, the first fluorescent dye stains baso, but immature granulocytes are hardly stained. By analyzing the fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye, it becomes possible to distinguish and identify baso stained with the first fluorescent dye from immature granulocytes, even in samples containing immature granulocytes. The first and second fluorescent dyes also have different fluorescence properties. The first fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 490 nm. The second fluorescent dye is, for example, a dye that is excited and emits fluorescence by absorbing light in the wavelength range of 610 nm to 750 nm, where its maximum absorption occurs. In the measurement of Baso, other white blood cells, and nucleated red blood cells, by preparing a measurement sample using the first fluorescent dye in addition to the second fluorescent dye and acquiring an optical signal with the FCM detection unit 460, it becomes possible to accurately measure Baso even in samples containing immature granulocytes, without performing remeasurement to distinguish between Baso and immature granulocytes. Chronic myeloid leukemia is a disease associated with an abnormal increase in Baso. If Baso and immature granulocytes can be distinguished and each can be accurately counted, an abnormal increase in Baso can be judged more accurately.
蛍光色素及び界面活性剤の詳細は後述する。測定装置による検体中の粒子の分析では、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素によって染色された測定試料中の粒子を分析する。本明細書において「測定試料中の粒子」とは、後述のFCM検出部460により個々に測定され得る、測定試料に含まれる有形成分をいう。測定試料中の粒子としては、例えば、検体に含まれる細胞、溶血した赤血球の残骸(赤血球ゴースト)、脂質粒子、真菌、細菌などが挙げられる。細胞は、例えば、白血球、赤血球、血小板(凝集した血小板を含む)などを含む。 Details of the fluorescent dyes and surfactants will be described later. In the analysis of particles in the sample using the measuring device, particles in the sample stained with the first and second fluorescent dyes are analyzed. In this specification, "particles in the sample" refers to formed elements contained in the sample that can be individually measured by the FCM detection unit 460 described later. Examples of particles in the sample include cells, hemolyzed red blood cell remnants (red blood cell ghosts), lipid particles, fungi, and bacteria. Cells include, for example, leukocytes, red blood cells, and platelets (including aggregated platelets).
測定ユニット400により処理される検体は、検体容器100に収容されている(図2参照)。検体容器100は、例えば採血管である。検体は、被検者から採取された体液又はその希釈物である。体液としては、血液、体腔液、脳脊髄液、関節液、腹膜透析排液、肺胞洗浄液などが挙げられる。血液は、例えば末梢血である。体腔液としては、例えば腹水、胸水、心嚢液などが挙げられる。体液の希釈物は、水、生理食塩水、緩衝液などの適切な水性溶媒により体液を希釈することにより得られる。緩衝液は、中性付近のpH(例えば6以上8以下のpH)で緩衝作用を有することが好ましい。市販の検体希釈液を用いてもよい。以下、血液及びその希釈物を「血液検体」とも呼び、血液を除く体液及びその希釈物を「非血液検体」とも呼ぶ。好ましい検体は、血液検体である。血液検体には、抗凝固剤が含まれてもよい。そのような抗凝固剤としては、エチレンジアミン四酢酸(EDTA)、EDTA塩(例えばEDTA・2K、EDTA・2Naなど)、クエン酸ナトリウム、ヘパリン、ワーファリンなどが挙げられる。 The sample to be processed by the measurement unit 400 is contained in the sample container 100 (see Figure 2). The sample container 100 is, for example, a blood collection tube. The sample is a body fluid or its dilution collected from the subject. Examples of body fluids include blood, body cavity fluid, cerebrospinal fluid, synovial fluid, peritoneal dialysis drainage fluid, and bronchoalveolar lavage fluid. Blood is, for example, peripheral blood. Examples of body cavity fluids include ascites, pleural fluid, and pericardial fluid. Dilutions of body fluids are obtained by diluting the body fluid with a suitable aqueous solvent such as water, physiological saline, or buffer solution. The buffer solution preferably has a buffering effect at a pH near neutral (for example, a pH of 6 to 8). Commercially available sample diluents may also be used. Hereinafter, blood and its dilutions will also be referred to as "blood samples," and body fluids other than blood and their dilutions will also be referred to as "non-blood samples." The preferred sample is a blood sample. Blood samples may contain anticoagulants. Examples of such anticoagulants include ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), EDTA salts (e.g., EDTA-2K, EDTA-2Na, etc.), sodium citrate, heparin, and warfarin.
測定試料は、測定ユニット400のFCM検出部460で測定される。FCM検出部460では、フローセル内を流れる測定試料中の各粒子に光が照射され、個々の粒子の光学的信号が取得される。光の照射により、測定試料中の粒子からは、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素のそれぞれに由来する蛍光が生じる。また、光の照射により、粒子から散乱光が発せられる。散乱光は、側方散乱光及び前方散乱光を含む。光学的信号は、各蛍光に対応する第1蛍光信号及び第2蛍光信号と、散乱光に対応する散乱光信号とを含む。取得された光学的信号はA/D変換されて、デジタルデータが取得される。分析ユニット300は、測定ユニット400で取得されたデジタルデータを分析して、検体中の粒子を検出又は分類する。 The sample is measured by the FCM detection unit 460 of the measurement unit 400. In the FCM detection unit 460, light is irradiated onto each particle in the sample flowing through the flow cell, and the optical signal of each particle is acquired. Upon light irradiation, fluorescence originating from the first and second fluorescent dyes is generated from the particles in the sample. Additionally, scattered light is emitted from the particles upon light irradiation. This scattered light includes lateral and forward scattered light. The optical signal includes the first and second fluorescence signals corresponding to each fluorescence, and the scattered light signal corresponding to the scattered light. The acquired optical signal is A/D converted to obtain digital data. The analysis unit 300 analyzes the digital data acquired by the measurement unit 400 to detect or classify particles in the sample.
第1実施形態の測定装置500は、血液検体中の白血球の計数及び分類の少なくとも一つを実行するとともに、白血球の増加機序を鑑別可能にする自動血球分析装置であり得る。測定装置500は、例えば、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を提供可能である。図2を参照して、第1実施形態の測定装置の測定ユニット400における流体系の構成例について説明する。測定ユニット400は、試料調製部440と、検体吸引部450と、FCM検出部460とを備える。試料調製部440は、チャンバ420と、送液機構430とを有する。検体吸引部450は、検体容器100内の検体Tを吸引する機構であり、検体吸引ノズル451を有する。FCM検出部460は、細胞を光学的に測定する第1光学式測定部であり、測定試料中の個々の粒子から発せられた光学的信号を取得する。FCM検出部460は、後述の光源、フローセル、ダイクロイックミラー及び受光素子を有する(図8~10参照)。 The measuring device 500 of the first embodiment may be an automated blood cell analyzer that performs at least one of counting and classifying leukocytes in a blood sample and enables differentiation of the mechanism of leukocyte increase. The measuring device 500 can, for example, provide information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase. Referring to Figure 2, an example of the configuration of the fluid system in the measuring unit 400 of the measuring device of the first embodiment will be described. The measuring unit 400 comprises a sample preparation unit 440, a sample aspiration unit 450, and an FCM detection unit 460. The sample preparation unit 440 has a chamber 420 and a fluid delivery mechanism 430. The sample aspiration unit 450 is a mechanism for aspirating the sample T in the sample container 100 and has a sample aspiration nozzle 451. The FCM detection unit 460 is a first optical measuring unit that optically measures cells and acquires optical signals emitted from individual particles in the measurement sample. The FCM detection unit 460 includes a light source, flow cell, dichroic mirror, and light-receiving element, as described later (see Figures 8-10).
検体吸引ノズル451は、蓋100aによって封止された検体容器100を貫通可能である。検体吸引部450は、検体吸引ノズル451を検体容器100に挿入するために、検体吸引ノズル451を移動可能である。例えば、検体吸引部450は、検体吸引ノズル451をチャンバ420の上方位置へ移動させるようXY方向に移動可能である。検体吸引部450は、検体吸引ノズル451によって検体Tを吸引し吐出するための定量部452(例えばシリンジポンプ)を有する。 The sample aspiration nozzle 451 is capable of penetrating the sample container 100, which is sealed by the lid 100a. The sample aspiration unit 450 is capable of moving the sample aspiration nozzle 451 to insert it into the sample container 100. For example, the sample aspiration unit 450 is capable of moving the sample aspiration nozzle 451 to an upper position in the chamber 420 in the XY direction. The sample aspiration unit 450 includes a quantitative unit 452 (e.g., a syringe pump) for aspirating and discharging the sample T using the sample aspiration nozzle 451.
送液機構430は、送液管431と、送液部432とを備える。送液管431は、試薬容器200とチャンバ420との間に設けられている。送液部432は、送液管431を介して試薬12を試薬容器200からチャンバ420に送る。試薬容器200は、試薬容器ホルダ60に装着されている。試薬容器200は、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素を含む試薬12を収容している。送液機構430は、送液管431を介して、試薬容器200からチャンバ420に試薬12を注入する機構である。チャンバ420内で、検体と試薬12とが接触することにより、検体に含まれる粒子が第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素によって染色される。 The liquid delivery mechanism 430 comprises a liquid delivery pipe 431 and a liquid delivery unit 432. The liquid delivery pipe 431 is located between the reagent container 200 and the chamber 420. The liquid delivery unit 432 delivers the reagent 12 from the reagent container 200 to the chamber 420 via the liquid delivery pipe 431. The reagent container 200 is mounted in a reagent container holder 60. The reagent container 200 contains the reagent 12, which includes a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye. The liquid delivery mechanism 430 is a mechanism that injects the reagent 12 from the reagent container 200 into the chamber 420 via the liquid delivery pipe 431. Within the chamber 420, the sample and the reagent 12 come into contact, staining the particles contained in the sample with the first and second fluorescent dyes.
試薬容器200内には、送液管431の第一端を構成する吸引管64が挿入される。送液管431の第二端は、チャンバ420に接続されている。吸引管64は、試薬容器ホルダ60に装着された試薬容器200が有する封止フィルム(シール部材ともいう)を貫通可能なように、鋭利な先端を有してもよい。この場合、吸引管はピアサとも呼ばれる。 A suction tube 64, which forms the first end of the liquid delivery tube 431, is inserted into the reagent container 200. The second end of the liquid delivery tube 431 is connected to the chamber 420. The suction tube 64 may have a sharp tip so as to be able to penetrate the sealing film (also called a sealing member) of the reagent container 200 mounted in the reagent container holder 60. In this case, the suction tube is also called a piercer.
送液機構430の送液部432は、ポンプ433を備える。ポンプ433は、試薬容器200から送液管431に試薬12を引き込むための陰圧と、引き込んだ試薬をチャンバ420に供給するための陽圧とを生成する定量部である。ポンプ433は、例えばシリンジポンプ、ダイアフラムポンプなどであり得る。送液機構430は、複数のバルブを備えてもよい。図2では、送液機構430は、電磁バルブV1及びV2を備える。例えば、シリンジポンプ又はダイアフラムポンプで構成されるポンプ433が試薬容器200から試薬12を吸引するとき、電磁バルブV1が開かれ、電磁バルブV2は閉じられる。ポンプ433が陰圧を生成することで、電磁バルブV1、V2及びポンプ433の間の流路に試薬が充填される。充填された試薬をチャンバ420に供給するときは、電磁バルブV1が閉じられ、電磁バルブV2が開かれ、ポンプ433が陽圧を生成する。これにより、試薬容器200中の試薬12がチャンバ420に供給される。 The liquid delivery section 432 of the liquid delivery mechanism 430 includes a pump 433. The pump 433 is a quantitative unit that generates negative pressure for drawing reagent 12 from the reagent container 200 into the liquid delivery pipe 431 and positive pressure for supplying the drawn-in reagent to the chamber 420. The pump 433 may be, for example, a syringe pump or a diaphragm pump. The liquid delivery mechanism 430 may also include a plurality of valves. In Figure 2, the liquid delivery mechanism 430 includes electromagnetic valves V1 and V2. For example, when the pump 433, which is composed of a syringe pump or a diaphragm pump, draws reagent 12 from the reagent container 200, electromagnetic valve V1 is opened and electromagnetic valve V2 is closed. The pump 433 generates negative pressure, filling the flow path between electromagnetic valves V1, V2 and the pump 433 with reagent. When supplying the filled reagent to the chamber 420, electromagnetic valve V1 is closed, electromagnetic valve V2 is opened, and the pump 433 generates positive pressure. This allows the reagent 12 in the reagent container 200 to be supplied to the chamber 420.
チャンバ420は、測定試料が調製される容器である。チャンバ420内で、試薬12と検体とが混合されて、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素で染色された粒子を含む測定試料が調製される。測定ユニット400において、チャンバ420は1つ又は複数備えられる。チャンバ420は、電磁バルブ37を介して廃液チャンバ36と接続されている。FCM検出部460による測定が完了した後、チャンバ420に残った測定試料は廃液チャンバ36に廃棄される。また、チャンバ420は、次の測定試料が調製される前に、図示しない洗浄機構によって洗浄され、洗浄後の液は廃液チャンバ36に廃棄される。 Chamber 420 is a container in which the measurement sample is prepared. Within Chamber 420, the reagent 12 and the sample are mixed to prepare a measurement sample containing particles stained with the first and second fluorescent dyes. The measurement unit 400 is provided with one or more chambers 420. Chamber 420 is connected to the waste liquid chamber 36 via an electromagnetic valve 37. After measurement by the FCM detection unit 460 is completed, the measurement sample remaining in Chamber 420 is discarded into the waste liquid chamber 36. Furthermore, before the next measurement sample is prepared, Chamber 420 is cleaned by a cleaning mechanism (not shown), and the resulting liquid is discarded into the waste liquid chamber 36.
測定ユニット400は、試薬容器ホルダ60を1つ又は複数備える。図2の例では、1つの試薬容器ホルダに、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素を含む試薬を収容した1つの試薬容器200が装着されている。測定ユニット400が複数の試薬容器ホルダを備える場合、例えば、第1蛍光色素を含む試薬を収容した試薬容器と、第2蛍光色素を含む試薬を収容した別の試薬容器とが、それぞれ異なる試薬容器ホルダに装着されてもよい。また、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素を含む試薬を収容した試薬容器と、溶血試薬を収容した別の試薬容器とが、それぞれ異なる試薬容器ホルダに装着されてもよい。 The measurement unit 400 is equipped with one or more reagent container holders 60. In the example shown in Figure 2, one reagent container 200 containing reagents with a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye is mounted in one reagent container holder. If the measurement unit 400 is equipped with multiple reagent container holders, for example, a reagent container containing the reagent with the first fluorescent dye and another reagent container containing the reagent with the second fluorescent dye may be mounted in different reagent container holders. Alternatively, a reagent container containing the reagents with the first and second fluorescent dyes and another reagent container containing a hemolytic reagent may be mounted in different reagent container holders.
試薬容器200は、試薬が収容される容器である。試薬容器200は、送液機構430の送液管431の第一端に接続された吸引管64が挿入される開口を有する。試薬容器200が試薬容器ホルダ60に装着される前の状態では、例えば、試薬容器200の開口は、封止フィルムで覆われている。試薬容器ホルダ60に装着された試薬容器200の開口に、吸引管64が挿入される。送液管431の第一端は、試薬容器200内の所定位置に固定される。所定位置は、例えば、第一端に接続された吸引管64の先端が試薬容器200内の底部に近接する位置であり得る。試薬容器200に挿入された吸引管64は、例えば、試薬容器200が試薬容器ホルダ60に装着されている間は、上述の所定位置に固定されている。また、少なくとも、複数の検体の測定が実行される間(すなわち、複数の検体のそれぞれに対応する複数の測定試料が調製される間)は、吸引管64が接続された第一端は、上述の所定位置に固定される。 The reagent container 200 is a container that holds reagents. The reagent container 200 has an opening into which a suction tube 64, connected to the first end of the liquid delivery tube 431 of the liquid delivery mechanism 430, is inserted. Before the reagent container 200 is mounted on the reagent container holder 60, for example, the opening of the reagent container 200 is covered with a sealing film. The suction tube 64 is inserted into the opening of the reagent container 200 mounted on the reagent container holder 60. The first end of the liquid delivery tube 431 is fixed in a predetermined position inside the reagent container 200. The predetermined position may be, for example, a position where the tip of the suction tube 64 connected to the first end is close to the bottom inside the reagent container 200. The suction tube 64 inserted into the reagent container 200 remains fixed in the above-mentioned predetermined position, for example, while the reagent container 200 is mounted on the reagent container holder 60. Furthermore, at least while the measurements of multiple specimens are being performed (i.e., while multiple measurement samples corresponding to each of the multiple specimens are being prepared), the first end to which the suction tube 64 is connected is fixed in the predetermined position described above.
FCM検出部460は、フローセル内を流れる測定試料中の個々の粒子に光を照射する。上述のとおり、粒子に光が照射されることにより、当該粒子から、第1及び第2蛍光色素のそれぞれに由来する蛍光が生じる。FCM検出部460は、各蛍光に対応する第1蛍光信号及び第2蛍光信号を含む光学的信号を取得する。FCM検出部460は、光が照射された複数の粒子に各々対応する複数の光学的信号を取得する。第1蛍光信号は、染色された粒子の第1蛍光色素に由来する蛍光に対応する信号である。第2蛍光信号は、染色された粒子の第2蛍光色素に由来する蛍光に対応する信号である。また、光が照射された粒子からは散乱光が発せられる。FCM検出部460は、散乱光に対応する散乱光信号を取得する。散乱光信号は、側方散乱光に対応する側方散乱光信号と、前方散乱光に対応する前方散乱光信号とを含む。FCM検出部460は、複数の光源を備えてもよい。例えば、FCM検出部460は、第1蛍光色素を励起可能な第1波長の光を照射する光源と、第2蛍光色素を励起可能な第2波長の光を照射する光源とを備えてもよい。あるいは、FCM検出部460は、単一波長の光を照射する光源を備え、当該単一波長の光から励起された第1及び第2蛍光色素からの各蛍光を検出するように構成されてもよい。 The FCM detection unit 460 irradiates light onto individual particles in the sample being measured, which are flowing through the flow cell. As described above, when light is irradiated onto the particles, fluorescence is generated from the particles, each originating from the first and second fluorescent dyes, respectively. The FCM detection unit 460 acquires optical signals including a first fluorescence signal and a second fluorescence signal corresponding to each fluorescence. The FCM detection unit 460 acquires multiple optical signals corresponding to each of the multiple particles irradiated with light. The first fluorescence signal is the signal corresponding to the fluorescence originating from the first fluorescent dye of the stained particles. The second fluorescence signal is the signal corresponding to the fluorescence originating from the second fluorescent dye of the stained particles. In addition, scattered light is emitted from the particles irradiated with light. The FCM detection unit 460 acquires a scattered light signal corresponding to the scattered light. The scattered light signal includes a side scattered light signal corresponding to side scattered light and a forward scattered light signal corresponding to forward scattered light. The FCM detection unit 460 may be equipped with multiple light sources. For example, the FCM detection unit 460 may include a light source that emits light of a first wavelength capable of exciting the first fluorescent dye, and a light source that emits light of a second wavelength capable of exciting the second fluorescent dye. Alternatively, the FCM detection unit 460 may include a light source that emits light of a single wavelength, and be configured to detect the fluorescence from the first and second fluorescent dyes excited by this single-wavelength light.
図3を参照して、図2に示される流体系を備える測定ユニット400の構成について説明する。測定ユニット400は、試料調製部440と、検体吸引部450と、装置機構部455と、FCM検出部460と、測定ユニット制御部480とを備える。試料調製部440は、検体と試薬を混合するためのチャンバと、試薬容器が設置される試薬容器ホルダ60とを含む。試料調製部440は、試薬容器ホルダ60に設置された試薬容器から、送液管を介してチャンバに試薬を送液する。検体吸引部450は、検体容器から検体を吸引し、吸引した検体を試料調製部440のチャンバに吐出する。チャンバ内で検体と試薬が混合されることで、測定試料が調製される。装置機構部455は、測定ユニット400の各部を動かすモータやアクチュエータを含む。装置機構部455は、例えば、検体容器100を移動させる機構を含む。 Referring to Figure 3, the configuration of the measurement unit 400, which includes the fluid system shown in Figure 2, will be described. The measurement unit 400 comprises a sample preparation unit 440, a sample aspiration unit 450, a device mechanism unit 455, an FCM detection unit 460, and a measurement unit control unit 480. The sample preparation unit 440 includes a chamber for mixing the sample and reagent, and a reagent container holder 60 in which the reagent container is installed. The sample preparation unit 440 delivers the reagent from the reagent container installed in the reagent container holder 60 to the chamber via a liquid delivery tube. The sample aspiration unit 450 aspirates the sample from the sample container and discharges the aspirated sample into the chamber of the sample preparation unit 440. The measurement sample is prepared by mixing the sample and reagent in the chamber. The device mechanism unit 455 includes motors and actuators that move various parts of the measurement unit 400. The device mechanism unit 455 includes, for example, a mechanism for moving the sample container 100.
測定ユニット制御部480は、アナログ処理部481と、A/D変換部481aと、IF(インターフェース)部484、488及び489と、バス485とを備える。アナログ処理部481は、FCM検出部460から出力されるアナログ信号を処理する。A/D変換部481aは、アナログ処理部481から出力されるアナログ信号をデジタル信号に変換する。IF部484は、A/D変換部481aとバス485とを電気的に接続する。IF部488は、試料調製部440、装置機構部455、検体吸引部450及びFCM検出部460と、バス485とを電気的に接続する。IF部489は、バス485と分析ユニット300とを電気的に接続する。バス485は、IF部484、488及び489と電気的に接続されている。 The measurement unit control unit 480 comprises an analog processing unit 481, an A/D conversion unit 481a, IF (interface) units 484, 488, and 489, and a bus 485. The analog processing unit 481 processes the analog signal output from the FCM detection unit 460. The A/D conversion unit 481a converts the analog signal output from the analog processing unit 481 into a digital signal. The IF unit 484 electrically connects the A/D conversion unit 481a and the bus 485. The IF unit 488 electrically connects the sample preparation unit 440, the device mechanism unit 455, the sample aspiration unit 450, and the FCM detection unit 460 to the bus 485. The IF unit 489 electrically connects the bus 485 to the analysis unit 300. The bus 485 is electrically connected to the IF units 484, 488, and 489.
第2実施形態の測定装置500は、血液検体中の白血球の計数及び分類、白血球の増加機序に関する情報の出力に加えて、赤血球(RBC)/血小板(PLT)の検出、及びヘモグロビン(HGB)濃度の測定の少なくとも一つを実行可能な多項目自動血球分析装置である。図4を参照して、第2実施形態の測定装置500の測定ユニットの構成について説明する。図4に示される測定ユニット400は、試料調製部440と、装置機構部455と、検体吸引部450と、FCM検出部460と、RBC/PLT検出部461と、HGB検出部462と、測定ユニット制御部480とを備える。試料調製部440、検体吸引部450、装置機構部455及びFCM検出部460については、第1実施形態の測定装置と同様である。 The second embodiment of the measuring device 500 is a multi-parameter automated blood cell analyzer capable of counting and classifying leukocytes in a blood sample, outputting information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase, detecting red blood cells (RBCs)/platelets (PLTs), and measuring hemoglobin (HGB) concentration, in addition to performing at least one of these functions. Referring to Figure 4, the configuration of the measuring unit of the second embodiment of the measuring device 500 will be described. The measuring unit 400 shown in Figure 4 comprises a sample preparation unit 440, a device mechanism unit 455, a sample aspiration unit 450, an FCM detection unit 460, an RBC/PLT detection unit 461, an HGB detection unit 462, and a measuring unit control unit 480. The sample preparation unit 440, sample aspiration unit 450, device mechanism unit 455, and FCM detection unit 460 are the same as those in the first embodiment of the measuring device.
RBC/PLT検出部461は、細胞を電気的に測定する電気式測定部であり、血液検体と希釈液とから調製された測定試料をアパーチャに導入し、細胞がアパーチャを通過する際に生じる電気抵抗の変化を検出することにより、赤血球及び血小板を計数する。HGB検出部462は、検体に含まれる血色素を光学的に測定する第2光学式測定部であり、ラウリル硫酸ナトリウム(SLS)ヘモグロビン法により血液検体中のヘモグロビン濃度を測定する。HGB検出部462は、血液検体とSLS溶血剤とから調製された測定試料に、SLSヘモグロビンの吸収波長である波長555nmの光を照射し吸光度を測定することにより、血液中のヘモグロビン濃度を取得する。以下、FCM検出部460、RBC/PLT検出部461及びHGB検出部462を総称して、「検出部460~462」と呼ぶことがある。 The RBC/PLT detection unit 461 is an electrical measurement unit that electrically measures cells. It introduces a measurement sample prepared from a blood sample and diluent into an aperture and counts red blood cells and platelets by detecting the change in electrical resistance that occurs when cells pass through the aperture. The HGB detection unit 462 is a second optical measurement unit that optically measures hemoglobin contained in the sample. It measures the hemoglobin concentration in the blood sample using the sodium lauryl sulfate (SLS) hemoglobin method. The HGB detection unit 462 obtains the hemoglobin concentration in the blood by irradiating a measurement sample prepared from a blood sample and SLS hemolytic agent with light at a wavelength of 555 nm, which is the absorption wavelength of SLS hemoglobin, and measuring the absorbance. Hereinafter, the FCM detection unit 460, the RBC/PLT detection unit 461, and the HGB detection unit 462 may be collectively referred to as "detection units 460-462".
測定ユニット制御部480は、アナログ処理部481、482及び483と、A/D変換部481a、482a及び483aと、IF部484、488及び489と、バス485とを備える。アナログ処理部481は、FCM検出部460から出力されるアナログ信号を処理する。A/D変換部481aは、アナログ処理部481から出力されるアナログ信号をデジタル信号に変換する。アナログ処理部482は、RBC/PLT検出部461から出力されるアナログ信号を処理する。A/D変換部482aは、アナログ処理部482から出力されるアナログ信号をデジタル信号に変換する。アナログ処理部483は、HGB検出部462から出力されるアナログ信号を処理する。A/D変換部483aは、アナログ処理部483から出力されるアナログ信号をデジタル信号に変換する。IF部484は、A/D変換部481a、482a及び483aとバス485とを電気的に接続する。IF部488は、試料調製部440、装置機構部455、検体吸引部450、FCM検出部460、RBC/PLT検出部461及びHGB検出部462と、バス485とを電気的に接続する。IF部489は、バス485と分析ユニット300とを電気的に接続する。バス485は、IF部484、488及び489と電気的に接続されている。 The measurement unit control unit 480 comprises analog processing units 481, 482, and 483, A/D conversion units 481a, 482a, and 483a, IF units 484, 488, and 489, and a bus 485. The analog processing unit 481 processes the analog signal output from the FCM detection unit 460. The A/D conversion unit 481a converts the analog signal output from the analog processing unit 481 into a digital signal. The analog processing unit 482 processes the analog signal output from the RBC/PLT detection unit 461. The A/D conversion unit 482a converts the analog signal output from the analog processing unit 482 into a digital signal. The analog processing unit 483 processes the analog signal output from the HGB detection unit 462. The A/D conversion unit 483a converts the analog signal output from the analog processing unit 483 into a digital signal. The IF unit 484 electrically connects the A/D conversion units 481a, 482a, and 483a to the bus 485. The IF unit 488 electrically connects the sample preparation unit 440, the device mechanism unit 455, the sample aspiration unit 450, the FCM detection unit 460, the RBC/PLT detection unit 461, and the HGB detection unit 462 to the bus 485. The IF unit 489 electrically connects the bus 485 to the analysis unit 300. The bus 485 is electrically connected to the IF units 484, 488, and 489.
図4に示される試料調製部440は、第1試料調製部440Aと、第2試料調製部440Bとを備える(図5参照)。第1試料調製部440Aは、FCM検出部460による光学的測定のための第1測定試料を調製する。第2試料調製部440Bは、RBC/PLT検出部による電気的抵抗式測定のための第2測定試料、及びHGB検出部462によるヘモグロビン測定のための第3測定試料を調製する。 The sample preparation unit 440 shown in Figure 4 comprises a first sample preparation unit 440A and a second sample preparation unit 440B (see Figure 5). The first sample preparation unit 440A prepares a first measurement sample for optical measurement by the FCM detection unit 460. The second sample preparation unit 440B prepares a second measurement sample for electrical resistance measurement by the RBC/PLT detection unit, and a third measurement sample for hemoglobin measurement by the HGB detection unit 462.
図5を参照して、第1試料調製部440Aは、第1チャンバ420を有する。第1チャンバ420は、試薬容器R1及びR2に接続されている。試薬容器R1は溶血試薬を収容している。試薬容器R2は希釈液を収容している。第1チャンバ420は、送液管431及び吸引管64を介して、試薬容器200にも接続されている。試薬容器200は染色試薬を収容している。第1チャンバ420とFCM検出部460の間には流路が設けられている。 Referring to Figure 5, the first sample preparation unit 440A has a first chamber 420. The first chamber 420 is connected to reagent containers R1 and R2. Reagent container R1 contains the hemolytic reagent. Reagent container R2 contains the diluent. The first chamber 420 is also connected to reagent container 200 via a liquid delivery tube 431 and a suction tube 64. Reagent container 200 contains the staining reagent. A flow path is provided between the first chamber 420 and the FCM detection unit 460.
第2試料調製部440Bは、第2チャンバ55を有する。第2チャンバ55は、試薬容器R2及びR3に接続されている。試薬容器R2は、第1試料調製部440Aと共通して設けられている。試薬容器R3はSLS溶血剤を収容している。SLS溶血剤は、赤血球を溶血し、かつヘモグロビン測定に適した測定試料を調製するための試薬である。 The second sample preparation unit 440B has a second chamber 55. The second chamber 55 is connected to reagent containers R2 and R3. Reagent container R2 is provided in common with the first sample preparation unit 440A. Reagent container R3 contains the SLS hemolytic agent. The SLS hemolytic agent is a reagent used to lyse red blood cells and prepare a sample suitable for hemoglobin measurement.
染色試薬を収容する試薬容器200は、試薬容器ホルダ60に装着される。試薬容器ホルダ60には、試薬容器200内の染色試薬を吸引するための吸引管64と、吸引管64を昇降させる吸引管昇降機構65と、が設けられている。吸引管64の先端は、試薬容器200のシール材を貫通(穿刺)可能である。吸引管昇降機構65には、カバー63が接続されている。吸引管昇降機構65が下降し、吸引管64が試薬容器200のシール材を貫通(穿刺)している状態で、カバー63も下降し、カバー63が試薬容器200を覆う。吸引管昇降機構65が上昇すると、カバー63も上昇し、試薬容器200が外部から取り外し可能になる。 The reagent container 200, which contains the staining reagent, is mounted in the reagent container holder 60. The reagent container holder 60 is equipped with a suction tube 64 for aspirating the staining reagent from the reagent container 200, and a suction tube lifting mechanism 65 for raising and lowering the suction tube 64. The tip of the suction tube 64 can penetrate (puncture) the sealing material of the reagent container 200. A cover 63 is connected to the suction tube lifting mechanism 65. When the suction tube lifting mechanism 65 descends and the suction tube 64 penetrates (punctures) the sealing material of the reagent container 200, the cover 63 also descends, covering the reagent container 200. When the suction tube lifting mechanism 65 rises, the cover 63 also rises, making the reagent container 200 removable from the outside.
吸引管64と第1チャンバ420の間には、送液機構430が設けられている。送液機構430は、送液管431と、定量ブロック432とを備える。送液管431は、その第一端が吸引管64によって構成され、第二端が第1チャンバ420に接続されている。定量ブロック432は、定量部30と、電磁バルブV1、V2とを備える。定量部30としては、シリンジポンプが用いられる。シリンジポンプに代えて、例えばダイアフラムポンプも使用可能である。電磁バルブV1及びV2は、流路を開閉する。試薬容器200内の染色試薬をチャンバ420に送液する場合、電磁バルブV1が開き、電磁バルブV2が閉じた状態で、定量部30が送液管431に陰圧を与える。これにより、吸引管64の先端から送液管431に染色試薬が吸引され、電磁バルブV1、V2、及び定量部30の間の流路に一定量の染色試薬が充填される。次に、電磁バルブV1が閉じ、電磁バルブV2が開いた状態で、定量部30が送液管431に陽圧を与える。これにより、電磁バルブV1、V2及び定量部30の間の流路に充填された一定量の染色試薬が押し出され、送液管431を通じてチャンバ420に染色試薬が供給される。 A liquid delivery mechanism 430 is provided between the suction tube 64 and the first chamber 420. The liquid delivery mechanism 430 comprises a liquid delivery tube 431 and a metering block 432. The liquid delivery tube 431 has its first end connected to the suction tube 64 and its second end connected to the first chamber 420. The metering block 432 comprises a metering unit 30 and electromagnetic valves V1 and V2. A syringe pump is used as the metering unit 30. A diaphragm pump, for example, can also be used instead of a syringe pump. Electromagnetic valves V1 and V2 open and close the flow path. When delivering the staining reagent from the reagent container 200 to the chamber 420, the metering unit 30 applies negative pressure to the liquid delivery tube 431 with electromagnetic valve V1 open and electromagnetic valve V2 closed. As a result, the staining reagent is drawn from the tip of the suction tube 64 into the liquid delivery tube 431, and a fixed amount of staining reagent is filled into the flow path between the electromagnetic valves V1 and V2 and the quantitative unit 30. Next, with electromagnetic valve V1 closed and electromagnetic valve V2 open, the quantitative unit 30 applies positive pressure to the liquid delivery tube 431. This pushes out the fixed amount of staining reagent filled into the flow path between electromagnetic valves V1 and V2 and the quantitative unit 30, and the staining reagent is supplied to the chamber 420 through the liquid delivery tube 431.
溶血試薬を収容する試薬容器R1と第1チャンバ420の間の流路には、定量部22と、電磁バルブV3、V4と、が設けられている。定量部22としては、シリンジポンプが用いられる。シリンジポンプに代えて、例えばダイアフラムポンプも使用可能である。電磁バルブV3及びV4は、流路を開閉する。定量部22、電磁バルブV3及びV4は、上述の電磁バルブV1、V2及び定量部30と同様にして、試薬容器R1内の溶血試薬を第1チャンバ420に定量的に送り込む。 A quantitative section 22 and electromagnetic valves V3 and V4 are provided in the flow path between the reagent container R1 containing the hemolytic reagent and the first chamber 420. A syringe pump is used as the quantitative section 22. A diaphragm pump, for example, can also be used instead of the syringe pump. Electromagnetic valves V3 and V4 open and close the flow path. The quantitative section 22, electromagnetic valves V3 and V4 quantitatively deliver the hemolytic reagent from the reagent container R1 to the first chamber 420 in the same manner as the electromagnetic valves V1 and V2 and the quantitative section 30 described above.
希釈液を収容する試薬容器R2と第1チャンバ420の間の流路には、定量部33と、電磁バルブV5、V6と、が設けられている。定量部33としては、シリンジポンプが用いられる。シリンジポンプに代えて、例えばダイアフラムポンプも使用可能である。電磁バルブV5及びV6は、流路を開閉する。定量部33、電磁バルブV5及びV6は、試薬容器R2内の希釈液を第1チャンバ420に定量的に送り込む。 A quantitative dispensing unit 33 and electromagnetic valves V5 and V6 are provided in the flow path between the reagent container R2 containing the diluent and the first chamber 420. A syringe pump is used as the quantitative dispensing unit 33. Alternatively, a diaphragm pump can also be used. Electromagnetic valves V5 and V6 open and close the flow path. The quantitative dispensing unit 33 and electromagnetic valves V5 and V6 quantitatively supply the diluent from the reagent container R2 to the first chamber 420.
第1チャンバ420には、不要になった溶液を収容する廃液チャンバ36が接続される。第1チャンバ420と廃液チャンバ36の間には、流路を開閉する電磁バルブV7が設けられる。第1チャンバ420は、第1チャンバ420内の液体を攪拌するために、第1チャンバ420内にエアを供給するポンプ56Aに接続されている。 A waste liquid chamber 36 for containing unwanted solution is connected to the first chamber 420. An electromagnetic valve V7 for opening and closing the flow path is provided between the first chamber 420 and the waste liquid chamber 36. The first chamber 420 is connected to a pump 56A that supplies air into the first chamber 420 to agitate the liquid within it.
希釈液を収容する試薬容器R2と第2チャンバ55の間の流路には、定量部38と、電磁バルブV8、V9と、が設けられている。定量部38としては、シリンジポンプが用いられる。シリンジポンプに代えて、例えばダイアフラムポンプも使用可能である。電磁バルブV8及びV9は、流路を開閉する。定量部38、電磁バルブV8及びV9は、試薬容器R2内の希釈液を第2チャンバ55に定量的に送り込む。第2チャンバ55には、不要になった溶液を収容する廃液チャンバ41が接続される。第2チャンバ55と廃液チャンバ41の間には、流路を、第2チャンバ55から廃液チャンバ41に通ずる流路と、第2チャンバ55からRBC/PLT検出部461及びHGB検出部462に通ずる流路との間で切り替える電磁バルブV10が設けられる。電磁バルブV13については後述する。 The flow path between the reagent container R2, which contains the diluent, and the second chamber 55 is equipped with a quantitative unit 38 and solenoid valves V8 and V9. A syringe pump is used as the quantitative unit 38. A diaphragm pump, for example, can also be used instead of the syringe pump. Solenoid valves V8 and V9 open and close the flow path. The quantitative unit 38 and solenoid valves V8 and V9 quantitatively supply the diluent from the reagent container R2 to the second chamber 55. A waste liquid chamber 41, which contains the unused solution, is connected to the second chamber 55. Between the second chamber 55 and the waste liquid chamber 41, a solenoid valve V10 is provided to switch the flow path between a flow path from the second chamber 55 to the waste liquid chamber 41 and a flow path from the second chamber 55 to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and the HGB detection unit 462. Solenoid valve V13 will be described later.
SLS溶血剤を収容する試薬容器R3と第2チャンバ55の間の流路には、定量部39と、電磁バルブV11、V12と、が設けられている。定量部39としては、シリンジポンプが用いられる。シリンジポンプに代えて、例えばダイアフラムポンプも使用可能である。電磁バルブV11及びV12は、流路を開閉する。定量部39、電磁バルブV11及びV12は、試薬容器R3内のSLS溶血剤を第2チャンバ55に定量的に送り込む。第2チャンバ55は、第2チャンバ55内の液体を攪拌するために、第2チャンバ55内にエアを供給するポンプ56Bに接続されている。 A quantitative dispensing unit 39 and electromagnetic valves V11 and V12 are provided in the flow path between the reagent container R3 containing the SLS hemolytic agent and the second chamber 55. A syringe pump is used as the quantitative dispensing unit 39. Alternatively, a diaphragm pump can also be used. Electromagnetic valves V11 and V12 open and close the flow path. The quantitative dispensing unit 39 and electromagnetic valves V11 and V12 quantitatively deliver the SLS hemolytic agent from the reagent container R3 to the second chamber 55. The second chamber 55 is connected to a pump 56B that supplies air into the second chamber 55 to agitate the liquid within it.
検体吸引部450は、吸引管20及び定量部21を有する。吸引管20は先端が鋭利に形成されている。検体吸引部450が吸引管20を下降させることで、吸引管20が検体容器100を塞ぐ蓋100aを穿刺し、内部に挿入される。吸引管20が検体容器100の内部に挿入された状態で定量部21が陰圧を生成することにより、検体容器100に収容された血液検体Tが吸引管20内に吸引される。検体吸引部450は、吸引管20を上方に移動させて検体容器100から吸引管20を抜き出し、吸引管20を第1チャンバ420の上方へ水平移動させる。検体吸引部450は、第1チャンバ420に対して吸引管20を下降させ、定量部21が陽圧を生成することにより、吸引された血液検体を第1チャンバ420に吐出する。検体吸引部450は、吸引管20を上方に移動させて第2チャンバ55の上方へ水平移動させ、第1チャンバ420のときと同様にして、血液検体を第2チャンバ55に吐出する。 The sample aspiration unit 450 has a suction tube 20 and a quantitative unit 21. The tip of the suction tube 20 is sharply formed. When the sample aspiration unit 450 lowers the suction tube 20, the suction tube 20 punctures the lid 100a that seals the sample container 100 and is inserted inside. With the suction tube 20 inserted inside the sample container 100, the quantitative unit 21 generates negative pressure, and the blood sample T contained in the sample container 100 is drawn into the suction tube 20. The sample aspiration unit 450 moves the suction tube 20 upward to remove it from the sample container 100 and moves the suction tube 20 horizontally above the first chamber 420. The sample aspiration unit 450 lowers the suction tube 20 relative to the first chamber 420, and the quantitative unit 21 generates positive pressure, thereby discharging the drawn blood sample into the first chamber 420. The sample aspiration unit 450 moves the suction tube 20 upward and horizontally above the second chamber 55, and discharges the blood sample into the second chamber 55 in the same manner as with the first chamber 420.
第1チャンバ420は、FCM検出部460(図4参照)に接続されている。第1チャンバ420に吐出された血液検体は、上述の試薬容器200に収容された染色試薬及び試薬容器R1に収容された溶血試薬と混合され、測定試料が調製される。測定試料では、赤血球は溶血試薬によって溶血されている。また、測定試料では、白血球を含む粒子が第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素によって染色されている。測定試料は、例えば次のようにして調製される。まず、第1チャンバ420に溶血試薬が供給され、次に第1チャンバ420に血液検体が吐出される。第1チャンバ420にエアが供給され、血液検体と溶血試薬とが撹拌される。これにより、血液検体中の赤血球が溶解される。血液検体と溶血試薬との混合物を含む第1チャンバ420に染色試薬が供給される。第1チャンバ420にエアが供給され、混合物と染色試薬とが撹拌される。第1チャンバ420内で蛍光色素と粒子との反応が進行する。反応時間は、例えば1分未満であり、好ましくは50秒未満であり、より好ましくは45秒未満である。これにより、血液検体に含まれる正常白血球と、存在する場合は異常細胞とを含む粒子が第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素によって染色されて、測定試料が調製される。FCM検出部460は、図示しないポンプに接続されており、ポンプの駆動により第1チャンバ420内の測定試料が流路を介してFCM検出部460に供給される。FCM検出部460は、第1蛍光色素に対応する蛍光及び第2蛍光色素に対応する蛍光を含む複数の光学的信号を各粒子から取得する。 The first chamber 420 is connected to the FCM detection unit 460 (see Figure 4). The blood sample discharged into the first chamber 420 is mixed with the staining reagent contained in the reagent container 200 and the hemolytic reagent contained in the reagent container R1 to prepare the measurement sample. In the measurement sample, red blood cells are hemolyzed by the hemolytic reagent. In addition, in the measurement sample, particles containing white blood cells are stained with the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye. The measurement sample is prepared, for example, as follows: First, the hemolytic reagent is supplied to the first chamber 420, and then the blood sample is discharged into the first chamber 420. Air is supplied to the first chamber 420, and the blood sample and the hemolytic reagent are stirred. This dissolves the red blood cells in the blood sample. The staining reagent is supplied to the first chamber 420 containing the mixture of the blood sample and the hemolytic reagent. Air is supplied to the first chamber 420, and the mixture and the staining reagent are stirred. The reaction between the fluorescent dye and the particles proceeds within the first chamber 420. The reaction time is, for example, less than 1 minute, preferably less than 50 seconds, and more preferably less than 45 seconds. This stains the particles containing normal leukocytes and, if present, abnormal cells in the blood sample with the first and second fluorescent dyes, preparing the measurement sample. The FCM detection unit 460 is connected to a pump (not shown), and the pump drives the measurement sample from the first chamber 420 to the FCM detection unit 460 via a flow path. The FCM detection unit 460 acquires multiple optical signals from each particle, including fluorescence corresponding to the first and second fluorescent dyes.
第2チャンバ55は、RBC/PLT検出部461と、HGB検出部462とに接続されている。電磁バルブV13は、第2チャンバ55からの測定試料のRBC/PLT検出部461への送液と、HGB検出部462への送液とを切り替える。RBC/PLT検出部461と、HGB検出部462は、図示しないポンプに接続されており、ポンプの駆動により第2チャンバ55内の測定試料が、RBC/PLT検出部461と、HGB検出部462のそれぞれに供給される。第2チャンバ55は、RBC/PLT検出のための測定試料と、HGB検出のための測定試料の両方の調製に用いられる。これらの測定試料は、例えば次のようにして調製される。まず、試薬容器R2から第2チャンバ55へ希釈液が供給される。次に、第2チャンバ55に血液が吐出される。これにより、希釈された血液を含む測定試料が得られる。この測定試料の一部がRBC/PLT検出部461へ送液され、電気抵抗式検出が行われる。次に、第2チャンバ55に残っている測定試料に、試薬容器R3からSLS溶血剤が供給される。これにより、赤血球が溶解され、かつヘモグロビンから生成されたSLSヘモグロビンを含む測定試料が得られる。この測定試料が、HGB検出部462へ送液される。図5の例では、RBC/PLT検出のための測定試料と、HGB検出のための測定試料とを共通の第2チャンバ55で調製しているが、それぞれ別々のチャンバで調製してもよい。 The second chamber 55 is connected to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and the HGB detection unit 462. The electromagnetic valve V13 switches between supplying the measurement sample from the second chamber 55 to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and supplying it to the HGB detection unit 462. The RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and the HGB detection unit 462 are connected to a pump (not shown), and the measurement sample in the second chamber 55 is supplied to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461 and the HGB detection unit 462, respectively, by the drive of the pump. The second chamber 55 is used to prepare both the measurement sample for RBC/PLT detection and the measurement sample for HGB detection. These measurement samples are prepared, for example, as follows: First, a diluent is supplied from the reagent container R2 to the second chamber 55. Next, blood is discharged into the second chamber 55. This yields a measurement sample containing diluted blood. A portion of this sample is sent to the RBC/PLT detection unit 461, where electrical resistance detection is performed. Next, SLS hemolytic agent is supplied from the reagent container R3 to the sample remaining in the second chamber 55. This lyses the red blood cells, resulting in a sample containing SLS hemoglobin generated from hemoglobin. This sample is then sent to the HGB detection unit 462. In the example shown in Figure 5, the sample for RBC/PLT detection and the sample for HGB detection are prepared in a common second chamber 55; however, they may be prepared in separate chambers.
上記のような構成を有する測定装置500は、赤血球数(RBC)、白血球数(WBC)、血小板数(PLT)、ヘモグロビン濃度(HGB)、ヘマトクリット値(HCT)、平均赤血球容積(MCV)、平均赤血球血色素量(MCH)及び平均赤血球血色素濃度(MCHC)の少なくとも8つのパラメータからなるCBC(Complete Blood Count)項目を測定可能である。測定装置500は、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を出力可能に構成されてもよい。測定装置500は、CBC項目に加えて、白血球を複数の亜集団に分類するDIFF項目を測定可能に構成されてもよい。CBC項目、DIFF項目に加え、他の項目(例えば、網赤血球(RET)、蛍光色素により染色した血小板(PLT)を測定する項目)を測定可能に構成されてもよい。 The measuring device 500 having the above configuration is capable of measuring the Complete Blood Count (CBC) item, which consists of at least eight parameters: red blood cell count (RBC), white blood cell count (WBC), platelet count (PLT), hemoglobin concentration (HGB), hematocrit value (HCT), mean corpuscular volume (MCV), mean corpuscular hemoglobin level (MCH), and mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration (MCHC). The measuring device 500 may be configured to output information regarding the mechanism of white blood cell increase. In addition to the CBC item, the measuring device 500 may be configured to measure the DIFF item, which classifies white blood cells into multiple subgroups. In addition to the CBC item and the DIFF item, other items (for example, items measuring reticulocytes (RET) and platelets (PLT) stained with fluorescent dye) may also be configured to measure other items.
図6を参照して、第1試料調製部440Aの変形例について説明する。図6において、図5と同様の要素は図示を省略している。上述のとおり、図5では、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素を含む試薬を1つの試薬容器200内に収容し、当該1つの試薬容器200内の試薬を1つの送液機構430によってチャンバ420内に送液するように構成された第1試料調製部440Aを例示した。図6に示される第1試料調製部440Aは、第1蛍光色素を含む試薬を第1試薬容器200Aに収容し、第2蛍光色素を含む試薬を第2試薬容器200Bに収容し、第1試薬容器200A内の試薬を第1送液機構430aによってチャンバ420内に送液し、第2試薬容器200B内の試薬を第2送液機構430bによってチャンバ420内に送液するように構成されている。この構成によっても、検体に含まれる粒子を2つの蛍光色素によって染色できる。 A modified example of the first sample preparation unit 440A will be described with reference to Figure 6. In Figure 6, elements similar to those in Figure 5 are omitted from the illustration. As described above, Figure 5 illustrates a first sample preparation unit 440A configured to contain reagents containing a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye in a single reagent container 200, and to deliver the reagents in the single reagent container 200 into the chamber 420 by a single liquid delivery mechanism 430. The first sample preparation unit 440A shown in Figure 6 is configured to contain a reagent containing the first fluorescent dye in a first reagent container 200A, a reagent containing the second fluorescent dye in a second reagent container 200B, to deliver the reagents in the first reagent container 200A into the chamber 420 by a first liquid delivery mechanism 430a, and to deliver the reagents in the second reagent container 200B into the chamber 420 by a second liquid delivery mechanism 430b. This configuration also allows for staining of particles contained in the sample with two fluorescent dyes.
図6の第1試料調製部440Aは、第1蛍光色素を含む試薬と、第2蛍光色素を含む試薬と、検体とを混合して測定試料を調製するための1以上のチャンバ420を備える。第1蛍光色素を含む試薬が収容された第1試薬容器200Aは、試薬容器ホルダ442の第1のホルダ部に装着される。第2蛍光色素を含む試薬が収容された第2試薬容器200Bは、試薬容器ホルダ442の第2のホルダ部に装着される。 The first sample preparation unit 440A in Figure 6 comprises one or more chambers 420 for preparing a measurement sample by mixing a reagent containing a first fluorescent dye, a reagent containing a second fluorescent dye, and a sample. The first reagent container 200A, containing the reagent containing the first fluorescent dye, is mounted in the first holder portion of the reagent container holder 442. The second reagent container 200B, containing the reagent containing the second fluorescent dye, is mounted in the second holder portion of the reagent container holder 442.
第1送液機構430aは、第1試薬容器200Aの試薬をチャンバ420に送液するために設けられている。第1送液機構430aの構成は、図2を参照して説明した送液機構430と同様である。第2送液機構430bは、第2試薬容器200Bの試薬をチャンバ420に送液するために設けられている。第2送液機構430bの構成は、第1送液機構430aと同様である。2つの送液機構430a及び430bの送液管431は、流路の途中で合流し、チャンバ420に接続されている。図6の例では、2つの送液管が合流している例を示すが、2つの送液管が個別にチャンバ420に接続されてもよい。 The first liquid delivery mechanism 430a is provided for delivering the reagent from the first reagent container 200A to the chamber 420. The configuration of the first liquid delivery mechanism 430a is the same as that of the liquid delivery mechanism 430 described with reference to Figure 2. The second liquid delivery mechanism 430b is provided for delivering the reagent from the second reagent container 200B to the chamber 420. The configuration of the second liquid delivery mechanism 430b is the same as that of the first liquid delivery mechanism 430a. The liquid delivery pipes 431 of the two liquid delivery mechanisms 430a and 430b merge midway along the flow path and are connected to the chamber 420. In the example in Figure 6, an example is shown where the two liquid delivery pipes merge, but the two liquid delivery pipes may also be connected to the chamber 420 individually.
図7を参照し、試料調製部440の一例を説明する。図7の例では、試料調製部440は、吸引管20により検体容器100から吸引された検体が分注される複数種類のチャンバを備える。 Referring to Figure 7, an example of the sample preparation unit 440 will be described. In the example shown in Figure 7, the sample preparation unit 440 is equipped with multiple types of chambers into which the sample aspirated from the sample container 100 by the suction tube 20 is dispensed.
RBC/PLT反応チャンバ420Aは、検体と希釈液とを混合して測定試料を調製するためのチャンバである。チャンバ420Aで調製された測定試料は、RBC/PLT検出部461で測定される。 The RBC/PLT reaction chamber 420A is a chamber for preparing a measurement sample by mixing the sample and diluent. The measurement sample prepared in chamber 420A is measured by the RBC/PLT detection unit 461.
HGB反応チャンバ420Bは、溶血剤、希釈液及び検体を混合して測定試料を調製するためのチャンバである。チャンバ420Bで調製された測定試料は、HGB検出部462で測定される。 The HGB reaction chamber 420B is a chamber for preparing a sample for measurement by mixing the hemolytic agent, diluent, and sample. The sample prepared in chamber 420B is measured by the HGB detection unit 462.
白血球分類用反応チャンバ420C及びDは、白血球を分類するための測定試料を調製するためのチャンバである。白血球分類用反応チャンバ420Cは、例えば、白血球を複数の亜集団(例えば、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球を含む亜集団)に分類するための測定試料を調製するために用いられる。白血球分類用反応チャンバ420Cでは、例えば、溶血剤、検体及び検体中の細胞を染色するための染色液(試薬)が混合されることで、測定試料が調製される。白血球分類用反応チャンバ420Dは、例えば、白血球の一形態である好塩基球の亜集団と有核赤血球の亜集団を分類するための測定試料を調製するためのチャンバである。白血球分類用反応チャンバ420Dで調製された測定試料の測定により、白血球数(WBC)が計数されてもよい。白血球分類用反応チャンバ420Dでは、例えば、溶血剤、検体及び検体中の細胞を染色するための染色液(試薬)が混合されることで、測定試料が調製される。 The leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and 420D are chambers for preparing measurement samples for classifying leukocytes. The leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420C is used, for example, to prepare measurement samples for classifying leukocytes into several subpopulations (e.g., subpopulations including lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils). In the leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420C, the measurement sample is prepared by mixing, for example, a hemolytic agent, a sample, and a staining solution (reagent) for staining the cells in the sample. The leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420D is a chamber for preparing measurement samples for classifying, for example, a subpopulation of basophils and a subpopulation of nucleated red blood cells, which are forms of leukocytes. The white blood cell count (WBC) may be counted by measuring the measurement sample prepared in the leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420D. In the leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420D, for example, a hemolytic agent, the specimen, and a staining solution (reagent) for staining the cells in the specimen are mixed to prepare the sample for measurement.
白血球分類用反応チャンバ420C及びDは、同じ用途に用いられてもよい。例えば、白血球分類用反応チャンバ420C及びDは、検体中の細胞を、少なくとも(1)白血球を少なくとも5つの亜集団(例えば、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球及び好塩基球を含む亜集団)、(2)有核赤血球の亜集団、に分類するための測定試料を調製するためのチャンバであってもよい。白血球分類用反応チャンバ420C及びDでの調製で用いられる溶血剤は、各々のチャンバで異なる組成の溶血剤が用いられてもよい。白血球分類用反応チャンバ420C及びDでの調製で用いられる染色液(試薬)は、各々のチャンバで異なる組成の染色液(試薬)が用いられてもよい。 The leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D may be used for the same purpose. For example, the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D may be chambers for preparing samples for classifying cells in a sample into at least (1) at least five subpopulations of leukocytes (e.g., subpopulations including lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils), and (2) subpopulations of nucleated erythrocytes. The hemolytic agents used in the preparation in the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D may have different compositions in each chamber. The staining solutions (reagents) used in the preparation in the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D may have different compositions in each chamber.
RET反応チャンバ420Eは、例えば、網赤血球の測定のための測定試料を調製するためのチャンバである。反応チャンバ420Eでは、検体、反応チャンバ420Eに対応する蛍光色素を含む試薬、及び、希釈液が混合され、測定試料が調製される。 The RET reaction chamber 420E is a chamber for preparing a sample for, for example, the measurement of reticulocytes. In the reaction chamber 420E, the sample, a reagent containing a fluorescent dye corresponding to the reaction chamber 420E, and a diluent are mixed to prepare the sample for measurement.
試料調製部440は、上記の反応チャンバ420に加え、他の反応チャンバを備えてもよい。例えば、試料調製部440は、蛍光色素で染色された血小板をFCM測定部460で測定するための測定試料を調製するための反応チャンバ420(PLT反応チャンバ)を備えてもよい。 The sample preparation unit 440 may include other reaction chambers in addition to the reaction chamber 420 described above. For example, the sample preparation unit 440 may include a reaction chamber 420 (PLT reaction chamber) for preparing a sample for measurement of platelets stained with a fluorescent dye in the FCM measurement unit 460.
図7の例において、それぞれの反応チャンバと、各反応チャンバに対応する検出部との関係を、本明細書において「測定チャネル」と呼ぶことがある。例えば、反応チャンバ420CとFCM検出部460が一つの測定チャネルである。図7の例では、試料調製部440は、反応チャンバ420A~Eにそれぞれ対応する5つの測定チャネルを備える。測定チャネルの数は、これに限らない。 In the example shown in Figure 7, the relationship between each reaction chamber and the corresponding detection unit is sometimes referred to as a "measurement channel" in this specification. For example, reaction chamber 420C and FCM detection unit 460 constitute one measurement channel. In the example shown in Figure 7, the sample preparation unit 440 is equipped with five measurement channels corresponding to reaction chambers 420A to E. The number of measurement channels is not limited to this.
試料調製部440が、図7に例示された複数の反応チャンバ420のうちのいずれを使用して測定試料を調製するかは、検体に対する測定オーダーに基づいて決定される。例えば、CBCの測定指示を含む測定オーダーを測定装置500が受信した場合、RBC、WBC、PLT、HGB、HCT、MCV、MCH及びMCHCの少なくとも8つのパラメータの測定結果を取得するため、試料調製部440はRBC/PLT反応チャンバ420A、HGB反応チャンバ420B及び白血球分類用反応チャンバ420Dで測定試料を調製する。反応チャンバ420Aで調製された測定試料はRBC/PLT検出部461で測定される。反応チャンバ420Bで調製された測定試料はHGB検出部462で測定される。反応チャンバ420Dで調製された測定試料は、白血球数(WBC)を得るため、FCM検出部460で測定される。検出部460、461及び462で得られた測定データに基づいて、上述のCBCに対応するパラメータが得られる。例えば、CBC項目に加えて、白血球の分類及び計数するためにDIFF項目を含む測定オーダー(CBC+DIFF)を測定装置500が受け付けた場合、CBCのパラメータに加え、白血球の分類(例えば、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球の5分類)及び計数の結果を取得するため、試料調製部440は、RBC/PLT反応チャンバ420A、HGB反応チャンバ420B、白血球分類用反応チャンバ420C及び白血球分類用反応チャンバ420Dで測定試料を調製する。反応チャンバ420Aで調製された測定試料はRBC/PLT検出部461で測定される。反応チャンバ420Bで調製された測定試料はHGB検出部462で測定される。反応チャンバ420C及びDで調製された測定試料は、FCM検出部460で測定される。 The sample preparation unit 440 determines which of the multiple reaction chambers 420 illustrated in Figure 7 to use to prepare the measurement sample based on the measurement order for the sample. For example, when the measuring device 500 receives a measurement order that includes a CBC measurement instruction, the sample preparation unit 440 prepares the measurement sample in the RBC/PLT reaction chamber 420A, the HGB reaction chamber 420B, and the leukocyte classification reaction chamber 420D in order to obtain measurement results for at least eight parameters: RBC, WBC, PLT, HGB, HCT, MCV, MCH, and MCHC. The measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420A is measured in the RBC/PLT detection unit 461. The measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420B is measured in the HGB detection unit 462. The measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420D is measured in the FCM detection unit 460 to obtain the white blood cell count (WBC). Based on the measurement data obtained by detection units 460, 461, and 462, parameters corresponding to the above-mentioned CBC are obtained. For example, if the measuring device 500 receives a measurement order (CBC + DIFF) that includes a DIFF item in addition to the CBC item for classifying and counting white blood cells, the sample preparation unit 440 prepares a measurement sample in the RBC/PLT reaction chamber 420A, HGB reaction chamber 420B, white blood cell classification reaction chamber 420C, and white blood cell classification reaction chamber 420D in order to obtain the results of white blood cell classification (for example, five classifications of lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils) and counting in addition to the CBC parameters. The measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420A is measured in the RBC/PLT detection unit 461. The measurement sample prepared in reaction chamber 420B is measured in the HGB detection unit 462. The samples prepared in reaction chambers 420C and 420D are measured by the FCM detection unit 460.
試料調製部440は、反応チャンバ420で測定試料を調製し、反応チャンバ420に対応する検出部に測定試料を供給する。検出部は測定試料ごとに測定を実行し、分析ユニット300は測定試料ごとに分析結果を提供する。試料調製部440は、例えば、複数の反応チャンバ420の少なくとも1つで、第1及び第2蛍光色素を用いた測定試料を調製する。 The sample preparation unit 440 prepares the measurement sample in the reaction chamber 420 and supplies the measurement sample to the detection unit corresponding to the reaction chamber 420. The detection unit performs measurement for each measurement sample, and the analysis unit 300 provides analysis results for each measurement sample. For example, the sample preparation unit 440 prepares measurement samples using first and second fluorescent dyes in at least one of the multiple reaction chambers 420.
試料調製部440は、複数の反応チャンバ420で、第1及び第2蛍光色素を用いた測定試料を調製してもよい。複数の反応チャンバ420で第1及び第2蛍光色素を用いた測定試料が調製される場合、各々の反応チャンバ420で用いられる第1及び第2蛍光色素は、反応チャンバ420ごとに異なってもよい。例えば、反応チャンバ420Cで用いられる第1及び第2蛍光色素と、反応チャンバ420Dで用いられる第1及び第2蛍光色素は、互いに異なってもよい。 The sample preparation unit 440 may prepare measurement samples using the first and second fluorescent dyes in multiple reaction chambers 420. When measurement samples using the first and second fluorescent dyes are prepared in multiple reaction chambers 420, the first and second fluorescent dyes used in each reaction chamber 420 may differ. For example, the first and second fluorescent dyes used in reaction chamber 420C may be different from those used in reaction chamber 420D.
また、複数の反応チャンバ420で第1及び第2蛍光色素を用いた測定試料が調製される場合、各々の反応チャンバ420で用いられる第1及び第2蛍光色素の少なくとも1つは、他の反応チャンバ420と共通であってもよい。例えば、反応チャンバ420Cで用いられる第1及び第2蛍光色素の少なくとも1つ(例えば、第1蛍光色素)と、反応チャンバ420Dで用いられる第1及び第2蛍光色素の少なくとも1つ(例えば、第1蛍光色素)は、共通であってもよい。 Furthermore, when measurement samples using the first and second fluorescent dyes are prepared in multiple reaction chambers 420, at least one of the first and second fluorescent dyes used in each reaction chamber 420 may be common to all other reaction chambers 420. For example, at least one of the first and second fluorescent dyes used in reaction chamber 420C (e.g., the first fluorescent dye) and at least one of the first and second fluorescent dyes used in reaction chamber 420D (e.g., the first fluorescent dye) may be common to all.
(蛍光色素の用途例1)
用途例1では、白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性であるか又は反応性であるかを区別するための第1及び第2の蛍光色素(上述の「蛍光色素の例1」参照)が用いられる。
(Example of fluorescent dye application 1)
In Example 1 of Use, first and second fluorescent dyes (see "Example 1 of Fluorescent Dyes" above) are used to distinguish whether the mechanism of leukocyte increase is neoplastic or reactive.
第1及び第2蛍光色素は、例えば、白血球分類用反応チャンバ420C及びDでの測定試料の調製で用いられる染色試薬の少なくともいずれかに含まれる。チャンバ420C及びDでの測定により、白血球分類の測定項目(「DIFF」の測定オーダーに対応する測定項目)の結果を得る場合において、チャンバ420C及びDの少なくともいずれかでの試料調製で第1及び第2蛍光色素が用いられる。このように試料調製することで、DIFFの測定オーダーに対する測定動作により、白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性であるか又は反応性であるかを区別することが可能となる。つまり、DIFFの測定オーダーに加えて追加の測定オーダーを発行することなく、白血球の増加機序の区別が可能となる。なお、この場合、チャンバ420Cで調製された測定試料に第2蛍光色素が用いられ、チャンバ420Dで調製された測定試料に第1蛍光色素が用いられてもよい。第1及び第2蛍光色素は、例えば、白血球分類用反応チャンバ420C及びDでの測定試料の調製で用いられる染色試薬の両方に含まれてもよい。 The first and second fluorescent dyes are included, for example, in at least one of the staining reagents used in the preparation of measurement samples in the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D. When obtaining results for leukocyte classification measurement items (measurement items corresponding to the "DIFF" measurement order) by measurement in chambers 420C and D, the first and second fluorescent dyes are used in the sample preparation in at least one of chambers 420C and D. By preparing the sample in this manner, it becomes possible to distinguish whether the mechanism of leukocyte increase is neoplastic or reactive based on the measurement operation in response to the DIFF measurement order. In other words, it becomes possible to distinguish the mechanism of leukocyte increase without issuing an additional measurement order in addition to the DIFF measurement order. In this case, the second fluorescent dye may be used in the measurement sample prepared in chamber 420C, and the first fluorescent dye may be used in the measurement sample prepared in chamber 420D. The first and second fluorescent dyes may be included in both of the staining reagents used in the preparation of measurement samples in the leukocyte classification reaction chambers 420C and D.
上述のCBC項目、もしくは、CBC項目及びDIFF項目は、血液検体中の細胞の分類及び/又は計数を行う検査における基本的な検査項目である。例えば、CBC、もしくは、CBC+DIFFの検査結果に基づいて、追加検査の必要性が判断される。よって、測定装置500による検査における多くの測定オーダーは、CBCの測定指示、もしくは、CBC及びDIFFの測定指示を含む。例えば、医療機関を訪れた被検者に対する1回目の血液検査(例えば、「初検」と呼ぶ)におけるほぼ全ての測定オーダーは、CBCの測定指示、もしくは、CBC及びDIFFの測定指示を含む。初検の検査結果に応じた追加検査では、CBCの測定指示、もしくは、CBC及びDIFFの測定指示を含まず、所定の追加検査項目(例えば、網赤血球:RET)のみを含む測定オーダーとなる場合もある。追加検査がなく、初検のみで検査が終了する場合もある。 The CBC (Cellular Blood Cell) and/or DIFF (Digestive Function) parameters mentioned above are fundamental test items in tests that classify and/or count cells in a blood sample. For example, the need for additional tests is determined based on the CBC or CBC + DIFF test results. Therefore, many measurement orders in tests performed by the measuring device 500 include instructions for CBC measurement, or instructions for CBC and DIFF measurement. For example, almost all measurement orders in the first blood test (e.g., referred to as the "initial test") for a patient visiting a medical institution include instructions for CBC measurement, or instructions for CBC and DIFF measurement. Additional tests based on the results of the initial test may not include instructions for CBC measurement, or instructions for CBC and DIFF measurement, but may only include a predetermined additional test item (e.g., reticulocytes: RET). In some cases, the test may be completed with only the initial test, without any additional tests.
本実施形態の例では、例えば、(1)反応チャンバ420Cで用いられる染色液に第1及び第2蛍光色素が含まれる、(2)反応チャンバ420Dで用いられる染色液に第1及び第2蛍光色素が含まれる、(3)反応チャンバ420Cで用いられる染色液及び反応チャンバ420Dで用いられる染色液のいずれにも第1及び第2蛍光色素が含まれる、もしくは、(4)チャンバCで用いられる染色液に第2蛍光色素が含まれ、チャンバDで用いられる染色液に第1蛍光色素が含まれる、ように構成される。上記(1)の場合、CBC+DIFFの測定指示を含む測定オーダーに対して、第1及び第2蛍光色素を用いた測定が実行される。上記(2)、(3)及び(4)の場合、CBC、もしくは、CBC+DIFFの測定指示を含む測定オーダーに対して、第1及び第2蛍光色素を用いた測定が実行される。上述のように、CBC、もしくは、CBC+DIFFの測定指示は、例えばほぼ全ての初検の測定オーダーに含まれるので、追加検査をすることなく、白血球の増加機序(腫瘍性又は反応性)に関する情報を含む測定結果を得ることができる。つまり、初検の1回の検査によって、白血球の増加機序(腫瘍性又は反応性)に関する情報を含む測定結果が得られる。また、上述の(1)、(2)及び(3)の場合、1つの測定チャネルによる測定動作で得られた結果に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を含む測定結果が得られる。 In the examples of this embodiment, for example, (1) the staining solution used in reaction chamber 420C contains the first and second fluorescent dyes, (2) the staining solution used in reaction chamber 420D contains the first and second fluorescent dyes, (3) both the staining solution used in reaction chamber 420C and the staining solution used in reaction chamber 420D contain the first and second fluorescent dyes, or (4) the staining solution used in chamber C contains the second fluorescent dye and the staining solution used in chamber D contains the first fluorescent dye. In case (1) above, a measurement using the first and second fluorescent dyes is performed in response to a measurement order that includes a measurement instruction for CBC + DIFF. In cases (2), (3) and (4) above, a measurement using the first and second fluorescent dyes is performed in response to a measurement order that includes a measurement instruction for CBC or CBC + DIFF. As mentioned above, the measurement instruction for CBC, or CBC + DIFF, is included in almost all initial examination measurement orders, so measurement results containing information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase (neoplastic or reactive) can be obtained without additional tests. In other words, measurement results containing information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase (neoplastic or reactive) can be obtained with a single initial examination. Furthermore, in the cases of (1), (2), and (3) above, measurement results containing information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase can be obtained based on the results obtained from the measurement operation using a single measurement channel.
(蛍光色素の用途例2)
用途例2は、網赤血球と血小板の測定を、各々を測定するための測定動作を分けることなく実行する例である。この例では、例えば、図7のRET反応チャンバ420Eが、RETとPLTとを測定するための測定試料を調製するためのRET/PLT反応チャンバ420Fに置き換えられる。RET/PLT反応チャンバ420Fでの測定試料の調製において、第1及び第2蛍光色素(上述の「蛍光色素の例2」参照)が用いられる。
(Example of fluorescent dye applications 2)
Application example 2 is an example in which reticulocytes and platelets are measured without separating the measurement operations for each. In this example, for example, the RET reaction chamber 420E in Figure 7 is replaced with a RET/PLT reaction chamber 420F for preparing a sample for measuring RET and PLT. In preparing the sample in the RET/PLT reaction chamber 420F, the first and second fluorescent dyes (see "Example 2 of Fluorescent Dyes" above) are used.
第1及び第2蛍光色素は、例えば、反応チャンバ420Fでの試料調製で用いられる染色試薬に含有される。反応チャンバ420Fによる試料の調製、及び、FCM検出部460による測定は、例えば、RETの測定指示を含む測定オーダーに応じて実行される。DNAへの結合能がRNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素により、DNAを有する血小板が染色される。RNAへの結合能がDNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素により、RNAを有するがDNAは有さない網赤血球が染色される。第1及び第2蛍光色素は、互いに蛍光特性も異なるので、第1蛍光色素に対応する蛍光信号と第2蛍光色素に対応する蛍光信号の分析により、血小板と網赤血球の分析が可能となる。反応チャンバ420Fでは、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素とを用いて測定試料が調製されるので、網赤血球と血小板を測定することができる。網赤血球のための測定と、血小板のための測定とがまとめて実行される。1つの測定動作(反応チャンバ420Fでの試料調製と、FCM検出部460による測定)により、網赤血球と血小板がまとめて測定される。つまり、1つの測定チャネルによる測定で、網赤血球と血小板の測定が可能となる。網赤血球の測定動作と、血小板の測定動作とを別々に実行することなく、網赤血球と血小板とを一括で測定できるので、測定時間が短縮できる。また、網赤血球の染色と血小板の染色を一つの染色試薬で行うことができるので、測定装置に搭載する試薬数が削減され、検査実行に要するコストが削減できる。網赤血球測定のための測定試料を調製するための反応チャンバと、血小板測定のための測定試料を調製するための反応チャンバとを一つに統合できるため、測定装置の小型化も可能となる。 The first and second fluorescent dyes are contained in, for example, the staining reagents used in sample preparation in the reaction chamber 420F. Sample preparation in the reaction chamber 420F and measurement by the FCM detection unit 460 are performed, for example, according to a measurement order including a RET measurement instruction. Platelets containing DNA are stained by the first fluorescent dye, which has a superior ability to bind to DNA than to RNA. Reticulocytes containing RNA but not DNA are stained by the second fluorescent dye, which has a superior ability to bind to RNA than to DNA. Since the first and second fluorescent dyes have different fluorescence properties, platelets and reticulocytes can be analyzed by analyzing the fluorescence signals corresponding to the first and second fluorescent dyes. In the reaction chamber 420F, a measurement sample is prepared using the first and second fluorescent dyes, so reticulocytes and platelets can be measured. Measurements for reticulocytes and platelets are performed together. Reticulocytes and platelets are measured simultaneously in a single measurement operation (sample preparation in reaction chamber 420F and measurement by FCM detection unit 460). In other words, reticulocytes and platelets can be measured using a single measurement channel. Since reticulocytes and platelets can be measured simultaneously without performing separate measurement operations for each, measurement time is reduced. Furthermore, since staining of reticulocytes and platelets can be performed with a single staining reagent, the number of reagents required in the measuring device is reduced, lowering the cost of performing the test. Because the reaction chamber for preparing the sample for reticulocyte measurement and the reaction chamber for preparing the sample for platelet measurement can be integrated into a single chamber, the measuring device can be made more compact.
(蛍光色素の用途例3)
用途例3は、白血球分類と、芽球及び前骨髄球の区別と、を行う例である。この例では、例えば、図7の反応チャンバ420Cでの測定試料の調製において、第1及び第2蛍光色素(上述の「蛍光色素の例3」参照)が用いられる。
(Example of fluorescent dye applications 3)
Example 3 of application is an example of performing leukocyte classification and distinguishing between blast cells and promyelocytes. In this example, for example, the first and second fluorescent dyes (see "Example 3 of Fluorescent Dyes" above) are used in the preparation of the measurement sample in the reaction chamber 420C shown in Figure 7.
第1及び第2蛍光色素は、例えば、反応チャンバ420Cでの試料調製で用いられる染色試薬に含有される。反応チャンバ420Cによる試料の調製、及び、FCM検出部460による測定は、例えば、DIFFの測定指示を含む測定オーダーに応じて実行される。核小体への結合能がRNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素で、核小体を有する芽球及び前骨髄球が染色される。RNAへの結合能が核小体に対する結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素で、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球等の成熟した白血球が染色される。芽球及び前骨髄球の核小体の量はそれぞれ異なっている。よって、芽球及び前骨髄球に結合する第1蛍光色素の量は、芽球及び前骨髄球それぞれの核小体の量に依存する。結合した第1蛍光色素の量の違いが、蛍光強度の違いとして測定される。そのため、第1蛍光色素の蛍光強度の違いに少なくとも基づく分析により、芽球及び前骨髄球の弁別が可能となる。また、第2蛍光色素による染色により、成熟した白血球の分類も併せて実行できる。1つの測定動作(反応チャンバ420Cでの試料調製と、FCM検出部460による測定)により、白血球分類と、芽球及び前骨髄球の弁別がまとめて実行される。つまり、1つの測定チャネルによる測定で、白血球分類と、芽球及び前骨髄球の弁別が可能となる。白血球分類の測定動作に加えて、芽球及び前骨髄球の測定動作を実行することなく、それらの測定動作を一括で測定できるので、測定時間が短縮できる。1つの測定チャネルでの測定結果から得られる情報量が増えるので、測定結果に基づく血球の分析能力が向上する。 The first and second fluorescent dyes are contained in staining reagents used, for example, in sample preparation in reaction chamber 420C. Sample preparation in reaction chamber 420C and measurement by FCM detection unit 460 are performed, for example, according to a measurement order including a DIFF measurement instruction. The first fluorescent dye, whose ability to bind to nucleoli is superior to its ability to bind to RNA, stains blast cells and promyelocytes that have nucleoli. The second fluorescent dye, whose ability to bind to RNA is superior to its ability to bind to nucleoli, stains mature leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils. The amount of nucleoli in blast cells and promyelocytes differs. Therefore, the amount of the first fluorescent dye that binds to blast cells and promyelocytes depends on the amount of nucleoli in each of the blast cells and promyelocytes. The difference in the amount of bound first fluorescent dye is measured as a difference in fluorescence intensity. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between blast cells and promyelocytes by analysis based at least on the difference in fluorescence intensity of the first fluorescent dye. Furthermore, staining with a second fluorescent dye allows for the simultaneous classification of mature leukocytes. A single measurement operation (sample preparation in reaction chamber 420C and measurement by FCM detection unit 460) performs both leukocyte classification and differentiation of blast cells and promyelocytes. In other words, leukocyte classification and differentiation of blast cells and promyelocytes are possible with a single measurement channel. Since the measurement of blast cells and promyelocytes can be performed in a single operation without requiring separate measurements for leukocyte classification, measurement time is reduced. The amount of information obtained from the measurement results of a single measurement channel increases, improving the ability to analyze blood cells based on the measurement results.
(蛍光色素の用途例4)
用途例4は、Basoと幼若顆粒球の弁別が可能となる例である。この例では、例えば、図7の反応チャンバ420Dでの測定試料の調製において、第1及び第2蛍光色素(上述の「蛍光色素の例4」参照)が用いられる。
(Example of fluorescent dye applications 4)
Application example 4 is an example in which Baso and immature granulocytes can be differentiated. In this example, for example, the first and second fluorescent dyes (see "Example 4 of Fluorescent Dyes" above) are used in the preparation of the measurement sample in the reaction chamber 420D shown in Figure 7.
第1及び第2蛍光色素は、例えば、反応チャンバ420Dでの試料調製で用いられる染色試薬に含有される。反応チャンバ420Dによる試料の調製、及び、FCM検出部460による測定は、例えば、DIFFの測定指示を含む測定オーダーに応じて実行される。細胞中の顆粒への結合能が核酸(例えば、DNA、RNA)に対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素で、顆粒(例えば、好塩基性顆粒)を含むBasoを染色する。DNAに対する結合能が、細胞中の顆粒への結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素による細胞の染色により、有核赤血球、Baso及びその他白血球を分類するための情報が得られる。検体に幼若顆粒球が存在していると、DNAを染色可能な蛍光色素のみによる測定では、Basoと幼若顆粒球との区別が難しい場合があった。DNAを染色可能な第2蛍光色素に加え、Basoに含まれる顆粒(例えば、好塩基性顆粒)を染色可能な第1蛍光色素を用いることで、Basoと幼若顆粒球の区別が可能となる。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、Basoに含まれる顆粒に特異的に結合可能である。このような第1蛍光色素を用いることで、例えば、第1蛍光色素がBasoを染色するが、幼若顆粒球はほぼ染色されないように測定試料を調製可能となる。第1蛍光色素に対応する蛍光信号の分析により、幼若顆粒球が存在する検体であっても、第1蛍光色素で染色されたBasoを幼若顆粒球と区別して特定することが可能となる。1つの測定動作(反応チャンバ420Dでの試料調製と、FCM検出部460による測定)により、Basoとその他白血球、及び、有核赤血球の分類と、Basoと幼若顆粒球の弁別がまとめて実行される。つまり、1つの測定チャネルによる測定で、Baso及びその他白血球、有核赤血球の分類と、Basoと幼若顆粒球の弁別と、が可能となる。1つの測定チャネルでの測定結果から得られる情報量が増えるので、測定結果に基づく血球の分析能力が向上する。反応チャンバ420Dは、例えば、CBCのみを測定指示に含む測定オーダーに対する測定動作でも用いられる。CBCの測定指示に対して、反応チャンバ420Dを用いた測定の結果は、例えば、CBC項目の白血球数の計数に用いられる。よって、用途例4は、CBCのみを測定指示に含む測定オーダーに対して、1つの測定チャネルによる測定で、Baso及びその他白血球、有核赤血球の分類と、Basoと幼若顆粒球の弁別と、が可能となる。 The first and second fluorescent dyes are contained in, for example, the staining reagents used in sample preparation in reaction chamber 420D. Sample preparation in reaction chamber 420D and measurement by FCM detection unit 460 are performed, for example, according to a measurement order including a DIFF measurement instruction. The first fluorescent dye, whose ability to bind to granules in cells is superior to its ability to bind to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), is used to stain Baso containing granules (e.g., basophilic granules). Staining cells with the second fluorescent dye, whose ability to bind to DNA is superior to its ability to bind to granules in cells, provides information for classifying nucleated red blood cells, Baso, and other white blood cells. When immature granulocytes are present in the sample, it was sometimes difficult to distinguish between Baso and immature granulocytes when measuring with only fluorescent dyes capable of staining DNA. By using a second fluorescent dye capable of staining DNA, as well as a first fluorescent dye capable of staining granules contained in baso (e.g., basophilic granules), it becomes possible to distinguish between baso and immature granulocytes. The first fluorescent dye can specifically bind to granules contained in baso, for example. By using such a first fluorescent dye, it becomes possible to prepare a sample so that, for example, the first fluorescent dye stains baso, but immature granulocytes are hardly stained. By analyzing the fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye, it becomes possible to distinguish and identify baso stained with the first fluorescent dye from immature granulocytes, even in a sample containing immature granulocytes. A single measurement operation (sample preparation in reaction chamber 420D and measurement by FCM detection unit 460) performs the classification of baso from other leukocytes and nucleated red blood cells, and the discrimination of baso from immature granulocytes all at once. In other words, a single measurement channel enables the classification of basoplasmic somatic cells (Basioplasma serotonin) and other leukocytes, as well as the differentiation of basoplasmic somatic cells (Basioplasma serotonin) and immature granulocytes. Because the amount of information obtained from a single measurement channel increases, the ability to analyze blood cells based on the measurement results is improved. The reaction chamber 420D can also be used, for example, in measurement orders that include only CBC (cardiac basin cell count). For CBC measurement orders, the results of the measurement using the reaction chamber 420D can be used, for example, to count the number of leukocytes in the CBC category. Therefore, in example 4, for measurement orders that include only CBC, a single measurement channel enables the classification of basoplasmic somatic cells (Basioplasma serotonin) and other leukocytes, as well as the differentiation of basoplasmic somatic cells (Basioplasma serotonin) and immature granulocytes.
図8を参照して、FCM検出部460の光学系の一例を説明する。FCM検出部460は、第1光源411aと、第2光源411bと、フローセル413と、ダイクロイックミラー418a、418b及び418cと、側方散乱光受光素子412a及び412bと、前方散乱光受光素子416と、側方蛍光受光素子422a及び422bとを備える。第1光源411a及び第2光源411bは、互いに異なる波長の励起光を射出する。例えば、第1光源411aは、第1蛍光色素を励起可能な第1波長の光を射出し、第2光源411bは、第2蛍光色素を励起可能な第2波長の光を射出する。第1波長は、例えば315nm以上490nm以下であり、好ましくは400nm以上450nm以下であり、より好ましくは400nm以上410nm以下である。第2波長は、例えば610nm以上750nm以下であり、好ましくは620nm以上700nm以下であり、より好ましくは633nm以上643nm以下である。各光源として、例えば半導体レーザ光源、アルゴンレーザ光源、ヘリウム-ネオンレーザ、水銀アークランプなどを使用できる。 Referring to Figure 8, an example of the optical system of the FCM detection unit 460 will be described. The FCM detection unit 460 includes a first light source 411a, a second light source 411b, a flow cell 413, dichroic mirrors 418a, 418b, and 418c, side-scattered light receiving elements 412a and 412b, a forward-scattered light receiving element 416, and side-fluorescence receiving elements 422a and 422b. The first light source 411a and the second light source 411b emit excitation light of different wavelengths. For example, the first light source 411a emits light of a first wavelength capable of exciting a first fluorescent dye, and the second light source 411b emits light of a second wavelength capable of exciting a second fluorescent dye. The first wavelength is, for example, 315 nm to 490 nm, preferably 400 nm to 450 nm, and more preferably 400 nm to 410 nm. The second wavelength is, for example, 610 nm to 750 nm, preferably 620 nm to 700 nm, and more preferably 633 nm to 643 nm. As the light source, for example, a semiconductor laser light source, an argon laser light source, a helium-neon laser, a mercury arc lamp, etc., can be used.
チャンバ420で調製された測定試料は、FCM検出部460のフローセル413に流される。図8の例では、紙面に対して垂直方向に測定試料が流される。フローセル413に測定試料が流れている状態で、第1光源411aから照射された光は、ダイクロイックミラー418aによって反射され、フローセル413内を流れる測定試料中の個々の粒子に照射される。第2光源411bから発せられた光は、ダイクロイックミラー418aを透過して、フローセル413内を流れる測定試料中の複数の粒子に照射される。 The sample prepared in chamber 420 is flowed into the flow cell 413 of the FCM detection unit 460. In the example shown in Figure 8, the sample is flowed perpendicular to the plane of the paper. While the sample is flowing in the flow cell 413, light emitted from the first light source 411a is reflected by the dichroic mirror 418a and irradiates individual particles in the sample flowing within the flow cell 413. Light emitted from the second light source 411b passes through the dichroic mirror 418a and irradiates multiple particles in the sample flowing within the flow cell 413.
第2光源411bから照射された光に対応する前方散乱光(第2前方散乱光)は、前方散乱光受光素子416によって受光される。図8の例では、前方散乱光受光素子416は、第2前方散乱光を受光するように配置される。あるいは、前方散乱光受光素子416は、第1光源411aから照射された光に対応する前方散乱光(第1前方散乱光)を受光するように配置されてもよい。この場合、第1前方散乱光が、前方散乱光受光素子416によって受光される。あるいは、第1及び第2前方散乱光の両方を受光するために、前方散乱光受光素子416とは別の受光素子をさらに配置してもよい。前方散乱光は、例えば、受光角度が0度から約20度、好ましくは0度から約5度の散乱光である。前方散乱光受光素子416は、例えばフォトダイオードである。 The forward-scattered light (second forward-scattered light) corresponding to the light emitted from the second light source 411b is received by the forward-scattered light receiving element 416. In the example of Figure 8, the forward-scattered light receiving element 416 is positioned to receive the second forward-scattered light. Alternatively, the forward-scattered light receiving element 416 may be positioned to receive the forward-scattered light (first forward-scattered light) corresponding to the light emitted from the first light source 411a. In this case, the first forward-scattered light is received by the forward-scattered light receiving element 416. Alternatively, a separate light receiving element may be provided in addition to the forward-scattered light receiving element 416 to receive both the first and second forward-scattered light. The forward-scattered light is, for example, scattered light with a reception angle of 0 to about 20 degrees, preferably 0 to about 5 degrees. The forward-scattered light receiving element 416 is, for example, a photodiode.
第1光源411aから照射された光に対応する側方散乱光(第1側方散乱光)は、ダイクロイックミラー418bによって反射され、側方散乱光受光素子412aによって受光される。第2光源411bから照射された光に対応する側方散乱光(第2側方散乱光)は、ダイクロイックミラー418cによって反射され、側方散乱光受光素子412bによって受光される。側方散乱光は、例えば、受光角度が約45度から約135度、好ましくは約90度の散乱光である。側方散乱光受光素子412a及び412bは、例えばフォトダイオードである。 The lateral scattered light (first lateral scattered light) corresponding to the light emitted from the first light source 411a is reflected by the dichroic mirror 418b and received by the lateral scattered light receiving element 412a. The lateral scattered light (second lateral scattered light) corresponding to the light emitted from the second light source 411b is reflected by the dichroic mirror 418c and received by the lateral scattered light receiving element 412b. The lateral scattered light is, for example, scattered light with a reception angle of about 45 degrees to about 135 degrees, preferably about 90 degrees. The lateral scattered light receiving elements 412a and 412b are, for example, photodiodes.
第1蛍光色素が励起されて生じた光に対応する側方蛍光(第1側方蛍光)は、ダイクロイックミラー418bを透過して側方蛍光受光素子422aによって受光される。第2蛍光色素が励起されて生じた光に対応する側方蛍光(第2側方蛍光)は、ダイクロイックミラー418cを透過して側方蛍光受光素子422bによって受光される。側方蛍光受光素子422a及び422bは、例えばアバランシェフォトダイオードである。あるいは、前方散乱光受光素子416、側方散乱光受光素子412a及び412b、側方蛍光受光素子422a及び422bとして光電子増倍管を用いてもよい。側方散乱光受光素子412a及び412bは、それぞれ第1受光部及び第2受光部とも呼ぶ。 The lateral fluorescence (first lateral fluorescence) corresponding to the light generated when the first fluorescent dye is excited is transmitted through the dichroic mirror 418b and received by the lateral fluorescence photodetector 422a. The lateral fluorescence (second lateral fluorescence) corresponding to the light generated when the second fluorescent dye is excited is transmitted through the dichroic mirror 418c and received by the lateral fluorescence photodetector 422b. The lateral fluorescence photodetectors 422a and 422b are, for example, avalanche photodiodes. Alternatively, photomultiplier tubes may be used as the forward-scattering light detector 416, the lateral-scattering light detectors 412a and 412b, and the lateral fluorescence photodetectors 422a and 422b. The lateral-scattering light detectors 412a and 412b are also referred to as the first and second light-receiving sections, respectively.
図9の例を参照して、フローセル413中を通過する粒子Pに光を照射したときに発せられる各種の光と、FCM検出部460の光学系との関係について説明する。図9では、第1光源411aから照射された光は、第1波長の光L1であり、第2光源411bから照射された光は、第2波長の光L2である。フローセル413中を通過する粒子Pに光L1及びL2が照射されると、光の進行方向に対して前方に前方散乱光(FSC)が生じる。図9の例では、受光素子416は、第2光源411bから照射された光に対応する前方散乱光を受光するので、第2波長の光に対応する第2前方散乱光のみを示し、第1波長の光に対応する第1前方散乱光は省略した。また、光の進行方向に対して側方に、第1波長の光に対応する第1側方散乱光(SSC-1)と、第1波長の光によって励起された第1側方蛍光(SFL-1)が生じる。さらに、光の進行方向に対して側方に、第2波長の光に対応する第2側方散乱光(SSC-2)と、第2波長の光によって励起された第2側方蛍光(SFL-2)が生じる。上記のとおり、FSC、SSC-1、SFL-1、SSC-2及びSFL-2は、それぞれ受光素子416、412a、422a、412b及び422bに受光される。各受光素子は、受光強度に応じたパルスを含む波形状の電気信号(光学的信号又はアナログ信号ともいう)を出力する。以下、FSCに対応するアナログ信号を「前方散乱光信号」、SSC-1に対応するアナログ信号を「第1側方散乱光信号」、SFL-1に対応するアナログ信号を「第1蛍光信号」、SSC-2に対応するアナログ信号を「第2側方散乱光信号」、SFL-2に対応するアナログ信号を「第2蛍光信号」ともいう。各アナログ信号の1つのパルスが、1つの粒子(例えば1つの細胞)に対応する。 Referring to the example in Figure 9, the relationship between the various types of light emitted when light is irradiated onto particles P passing through the flow cell 413 and the optical system of the FCM detection unit 460 will be explained. In Figure 9, the light irradiated from the first light source 411a is light of the first wavelength L1, and the light irradiated from the second light source 411b is light of the second wavelength L2. When light L1 and L2 are irradiated onto particles P passing through the flow cell 413, forward scattered light (FSC) is generated in front of the direction of light propagation. In the example in Figure 9, the photodetector 416 receives the forward scattered light corresponding to the light irradiated from the second light source 411b, so only the second forward scattered light corresponding to the second wavelength is shown, and the first forward scattered light corresponding to the first wavelength is omitted. In addition, a first side scattered light (SSC-1) corresponding to the first wavelength and a first side fluorescence (SFL-1) excited by the first wavelength are generated to the side of the direction of light propagation. Furthermore, a second lateral scattered light (SSC-2) corresponding to the second wavelength of light and a second lateral fluorescence (SFL-2) excited by the second wavelength of light are generated laterally relative to the direction of light propagation. As described above, FSC, SSC-1, SFL-1, SSC-2, and SFL-2 are received by photodetectors 416, 412a, 422a, 412b, and 422b, respectively. Each photodetector outputs a waveform electrical signal (also called an optical signal or analog signal) containing pulses corresponding to the received light intensity. Hereinafter, the analog signal corresponding to FSC will be referred to as the "forward scattered light signal," the analog signal corresponding to SSC-1 as the "first lateral scattered light signal," the analog signal corresponding to SFL-1 as the "first fluorescence signal," the analog signal corresponding to SSC-2 as the "second lateral scattered light signal," and the analog signal corresponding to SFL-2 as the "second fluorescence signal." One pulse of each analog signal corresponds to one particle (for example, one cell).
各種の光に対応するアナログ信号は、それぞれアナログ処理部481に入力されて、ノイズ除去、平滑化等の処理が行われる。A/D変換部482は、所定のサンプリングレート(例えば、10ナノ秒間隔で1024ポイントのサンプリング、80ナノ秒間隔で128ポイントのサンプリング、又は160ナノ秒間隔で64ポイントのサンプリング等)で、アナログ処理部481から出力されるアナログ信号をサンプリングする。A/D変換部482は、サンプリングしたアナログ信号をデジタル化して、波形データを生成する。A/D変換部482は、フローセル413を流れる個々の細胞に対応する5種類のアナログ信号をサンプリング及びデジタル化して、前方散乱光データ、第1側方散乱光データ、第1蛍光データ、第2側方散乱光データ及び第2蛍光データを生成する。前方散乱光データ、第1側方散乱光データ、第1蛍光データ、第2側方散乱光データ及び第2蛍光データは、時系列に並んだ複数の値で構成される波形データである。生成された波形データは分析ユニット300に送信され、分析ユニット300は、各信号の波形データから個々の細胞の形態的特徴を表す特徴パラメータを計算する。そのような特徴パラメータとしては、例えばピーク値(パルスのピークの高さ)、パルス幅、パルス面積、透過率、ストークスシフト、比率、経時変化及びそれらに相関する値などが挙げられる。 Analog signals corresponding to various types of light are input to the analog processing unit 481, where processing such as noise reduction and smoothing is performed. The A/D conversion unit 482 samples the analog signals output from the analog processing unit 481 at a predetermined sampling rate (for example, sampling 1024 points at 10 nanosecond intervals, sampling 128 points at 80 nanosecond intervals, or sampling 64 points at 160 nanosecond intervals). The A/D conversion unit 482 digitizes the sampled analog signals to generate waveform data. The A/D conversion unit 482 samples and digitizes five types of analog signals corresponding to individual cells flowing through the flow cell 413 to generate forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data. The forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data are waveform data composed of multiple values arranged in time series. The generated waveform data is transmitted to the analysis unit 300, which calculates feature parameters representing the morphological characteristics of individual cells from the waveform data of each signal. Such feature parameters include, for example, peak value (height of the pulse peak), pulse width, pulse area, transmittance, Stokes shift, ratio, changes over time, and values correlated therewith.
光学的情報は、上記の特徴パラメータであり得る。光学的情報は、少なくとも第1蛍光情報及び第2蛍光情報を含む。第1蛍光情報は、有核細胞中のDNAを染色した蛍光色素の量を反映する情報であれば特に限定されない。第2蛍光情報は、有核細胞中のRNAを染色した蛍光色素の量を反映する情報であれば特に限定されない。第1蛍光情報及び第2蛍光情報としては、それぞれ第1蛍光データのピーク値(第1蛍光データのうち、最も大きい値であり、「第1蛍光強度」ともいう)及び第2蛍光データのピーク値(第2蛍光データのうち、最も大きい値であり、「第2蛍光強度」ともいう)が好ましい。光学的情報は散乱光情報をさらに含む。散乱光情報は、前方散乱光情報、第1側方散乱光情報及び第2側方散乱光情報が挙げられる。側方散乱光情報は、細胞構造の複雑性、顆粒特性、核構造、分葉度などの内部情報を反映する情報であれば特に限定されない。第1側方散乱光情報及び第2側方散乱光情報としては、それぞれ第1側方散乱光データのピーク値(第1側方散乱光データのうち、最も大きい値であり、「第1側方散乱光強度」ともいう)及び第2側方散乱光データのピーク値(第2側方散乱光データのうち、最も大きい値であり、「第2側方散乱光強度」ともいう)が好ましい。前方散乱光情報は、細胞の大きさを反映する情報であれば特に限定されない。前方散乱光情報としては、前方散乱光データのピーク値(前方散乱光データのうち、最も大きい値であり、「前方散乱光強度」とも呼ぶ)が好ましい。 Optical information may be the characteristic parameters described above. Optical information includes at least first fluorescence information and second fluorescence information. The first fluorescence information is not particularly limited as long as it reflects the amount of fluorescent dye used to stain DNA in nucleated cells. The second fluorescence information is not particularly limited as long as it reflects the amount of fluorescent dye used to stain RNA in nucleated cells. Preferably, the first fluorescence information and the second fluorescence information are the peak value of the first fluorescence data (the largest value among the first fluorescence data, also called the "first fluorescence intensity") and the peak value of the second fluorescence data (the largest value among the second fluorescence data, also called the "second fluorescence intensity"), respectively. Optical information further includes scattered light information. Scattered light information includes forward scattered light information, first lateral scattered light information, and second lateral scattered light information. The lateral scattered light information is not particularly limited as long as it reflects internal information such as the complexity of the cell structure, granular characteristics, nuclear structure, and degree of lobulation. The first and second lateral scattered light information are preferably the peak value of the first lateral scattered light data (the largest value among the first lateral scattered light data, also called the "first lateral scattered light intensity") and the peak value of the second lateral scattered light data (the largest value among the second lateral scattered light data, also called the "second lateral scattered light intensity"), respectively. The forward scattered light information is not particularly limited as long as it reflects the size of the cell. The forward scattered light information is preferably the peak value of the forward scattered light data (the largest value among the forward scattered light data, also called the "forward scattered light intensity").
図10を参照して、一つの光源を備えるFCM検出部の光学系の例について説明する。FCM検出部460は、光源411、フローセル413と、ダイクロイックミラー418と、側方散乱光受光素子412と、前方散乱光受光素子416と、側方蛍光受光素子422a及び422bとを備える。光源411は、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素の両方を励起可能な波長の光を射出する光源である。光源411から発せられた光は、フローセル413内を流れる測定試料中の個々の粒子に照射される。第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素で染色された測定試料中の粒子に光源411の光が照射され、第1側方蛍光及び第2側方蛍光が生じる。すなわち、FCM検出部460は、一つの光源により、測定試料中の複数の粒子(すなわち、第1及び第2蛍光色素で染色された複数の粒子)に各々対応する第1蛍光信号及び第2蛍光信号を取得できる。 Referring to Figure 10, an example of the optical system of an FCM detection unit equipped with a single light source will be described. The FCM detection unit 460 comprises a light source 411, a flow cell 413, a dichroic mirror 418, a side-scatter light receiving element 412, a forward-scatter light receiving element 416, and side-fluorescence receiving elements 422a and 422b. The light source 411 emits light of a wavelength capable of exciting both the first and second fluorescent dyes. The light emitted from the light source 411 irradiates individual particles in the sample being measured, flowing through the flow cell 413. The light from the light source 411 irradiates particles in the sample stained with the first and second fluorescent dyes, generating first and second side fluorescence. That is, the FCM detection unit 460 can acquire first and second fluorescence signals corresponding to multiple particles in the sample (i.e., multiple particles stained with the first and second fluorescent dyes) using a single light source.
光源411から照射された光に対応する前方散乱光は、前方散乱光受光素子416によって受光される。光源411から照射された光に対応する側方散乱光は、ダイクロイックミラー418によって反射され、側方散乱光受光素子412によって受光される。第1側方蛍光は、側方蛍光受光素子422aによって受光される。第2側方蛍光は、ダイクロイックミラー418を透過して側方蛍光受光素子422bによって受光される。よって、FCM検出部460は、測定試料中の複数の粒子に各々対応する前方散乱光信号、第1側方散乱光信号、第1蛍光信号及び第2蛍光信号を取得できる。 The forward scattered light corresponding to the light emitted from the light source 411 is received by the forward scattered light receiving element 416. The side scattered light corresponding to the light emitted from the light source 411 is reflected by the dichroic mirror 418 and received by the side scattered light receiving element 412. The first side fluorescence is received by the side fluorescence receiving element 422a. The second side fluorescence passes through the dichroic mirror 418 and is received by the side fluorescence receiving element 422b. Therefore, the FCM detection unit 460 can acquire the forward scattered light signal, the first side scattered light signal, the first fluorescence signal, and the second fluorescence signal, each corresponding to multiple particles in the measurement sample.
光源411から照射される光は、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素の両方を励起するため、複数の波長を含む光であることが好ましい。そのような光としては、例えば白色光が挙げられる。あるいは、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素が一つの波長の光で励起可能な程度に近い波長域に極大吸収を有する場合、光源411から照射される光は当該一つの波長の光であってもよい。例えば、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素の一方が極大吸収を400nm以上520nm以下の波長域に有し、他方が極大吸収を300nm以上420nm以下の波長域に有する場合、光源411から照射される光は400nm以上420nm以下に中心波長を有する光、例えば405nmの光であり得る。また、例えば、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素の極大吸収が630nm以上660nm以下の波長域内にあり、第1蛍光色素又は第2蛍光色素の一方が660nm以上670nm以下の波長域にピークを有する蛍光を発し、他方が670nmより長波長域にピークを有する蛍光を発する場合、光源411から照射される光は630nm以上655nm以下に中心波長を有する光、例えば633nmの光であり得る。第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素の組み合わせによっては、光源411からこのような一つの波長の光を照射することにより、FCM検出部460は、第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素の両方を励起でき、かつ、それぞれの蛍光色素から生じる蛍光を区別して検出できる。 The light emitted from the light source 411 is preferably light containing multiple wavelengths in order to excite both the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye. Examples of such light include white light. Alternatively, if the first and second fluorescent dyes have maximum absorption in a wavelength range close to the point where they can be excited by a single wavelength of light, the light emitted from the light source 411 may be light of that single wavelength. For example, if one of the first and second fluorescent dyes has maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 400 nm to 520 nm, and the other has maximum absorption in the wavelength range of 300 nm to 420 nm, the light emitted from the light source 411 may be light with a central wavelength of 400 nm to 420 nm, for example, light of 405 nm. Furthermore, for example, if the maximum absorption of the first and second fluorescent dyes lies within a wavelength range of 630 nm to 660 nm, and one of the first or second fluorescent dyes emits fluorescence with a peak in the wavelength range of 660 nm to 670 nm, while the other emits fluorescence with a peak in the wavelength range longer than 670 nm, then the light irradiated from the light source 411 may have a central wavelength of 630 nm to 655 nm, for example, light at 633 nm. Depending on the combination of the first and second fluorescent dyes, by irradiating with such a single wavelength of light from the light source 411, the FCM detection unit 460 can excite both the first and second fluorescent dyes and distinguish and detect the fluorescence generated from each fluorescent dye.
図11を参照して、分析ユニット300の構成について説明する。分析ユニット300は、インターフェース部305を介して測定ユニット400と電気的に接続される。インターフェース部305は、例えばUSBインターフェースである。分析ユニット300は、プロセッサ301と、メインメモリ302と、バス303と、記憶部304と、インターフェース部305と、表示部306と、操作部307とを備える。分析ユニット300は、例えばパーソナルコンピュータ(図1の分析ユニット300を参照)によって構成されており、記憶部304に格納されたプログラムを実行することで、測定装置500の測定ユニット400を制御する。分析ユニット300は、例えば、分析用プログラムを実行し、測定ユニット400から取得したデータを分析する。分析ユニット300は、分析結果を表示部306に表示する。 Referring to Figure 11, the configuration of the analysis unit 300 will be described. The analysis unit 300 is electrically connected to the measurement unit 400 via an interface unit 305. The interface unit 305 is, for example, a USB interface. The analysis unit 300 comprises a processor 301, a main memory 302, a bus 303, a storage unit 304, an interface unit 305, a display unit 306, and an operation unit 307. The analysis unit 300 is configured, for example, by a personal computer (see the analysis unit 300 in Figure 1), and controls the measurement unit 400 of the measurement device 500 by executing a program stored in the storage unit 304. The analysis unit 300, for example, executes an analysis program and analyzes the data acquired from the measurement unit 400. The analysis unit 300 displays the analysis results on the display unit 306.
分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光信号に対応する第1蛍光情報及び第2蛍光信号に対応する第2蛍光情報を含む光学的情報に基づいて、粒子(特に細胞)の分類及び計数の少なくとも一つを行う。光学的情報は、散乱光信号に対応する散乱光情報をさらに含むことが好ましい。散乱光情報は、側方散乱光信号に対応する側方散乱光情報と、前方散乱光信号に対応する前方散乱光情報とを含む。被検者の健康状態や疾患に応じて白血球が健常時に比べて増加している場合、分析ユニット300は、光学的情報に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を生成可能である。 The analysis unit 300 performs at least one of the classification and counting of particles (particularly cells) based on optical information including first fluorescence information corresponding to a first fluorescence signal and second fluorescence information corresponding to a second fluorescence signal. Preferably, the optical information further includes scattered light information corresponding to a scattered light signal. The scattered light information includes lateral scattered light information corresponding to a lateral scattered light signal and forward scattered light information corresponding to a forward scattered light signal. If the white blood cell count is increased compared to normal levels due to the subject's health condition or disease, the analysis unit 300 can generate information regarding the mechanism of the white blood cell increase based on the optical information.
分析ユニット300は、複数の粒子の各々の光学的情報に基づいて、細胞の分類を行ってもよい。例えば、分析ユニット300は、ある一つの細胞に対応する波形データ(例えば、前方散乱光データ、第1側方散乱光データ、第1蛍光データ、第2側方散乱光データ及び第2蛍光データの少なくとも1つ、好ましくは複数、に対応する波形データ)を光学的情報として学習済みのAIアルゴリズムに入力することで、その細胞の分類を行ってもよい。あるいは、分析ユニット300は、ある一つの粒子に対応する波形データ(例えば、前方散乱光データ、第1側方散乱光データ、第1蛍光データ、第2側方散乱光データ、及び第2蛍光データ)の特徴パラメータ(例えばピーク値、パルス幅及びパルス面積)を光学的情報として、特徴パラメータに基づいて、細胞の分類を行ってもよい。複数の特徴パラメータを用いて粒子を複数の種類に分類する方法としては、例えば、複数のパラメータを軸とする多次元の座標空間に粒子をプロットし、少なくともいくつかの粒子を複数の種類に対応する複数の集団に分類し、各集団の重心位置と粒子との距離に基づいて各集団に対する各粒子の帰属度を求め、帰属度に基づいて粒子を再分類することで複数の粒子を複数の種類に分類する方法が採用できる。このような分類方法は、例えば米国特許第5,555,198号明細書に記載されている。米国特許第5,555,198号明細書は、参照として本明細書に組み込まれる。あるいは、一つの測定試料に含まれる一部の粒子に対してはAIアルゴリズムに基づく分類を行い、他の粒子に対しては特徴パラメータに基づく分類を行ってもよい。 The analysis unit 300 may classify cells based on the optical information of each of the multiple particles. For example, the analysis unit 300 may classify a cell by inputting waveform data corresponding to a single cell (e.g., waveform data corresponding to at least one, preferably multiple, of forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data) as optical information into a trained AI algorithm. Alternatively, the analysis unit 300 may classify cells based on the characteristic parameters (e.g., peak value, pulse width, and pulse area) of the waveform data corresponding to a single particle (e.g., forward scattered light data, first side scattered light data, first fluorescence data, second side scattered light data, and second fluorescence data) as optical information. One method for classifying particles into multiple types using multiple characteristic parameters is to plot the particles in a multidimensional coordinate space with multiple parameters as axes, classify at least some particles into multiple groups corresponding to multiple types, determine the degree of belonging of each particle to each group based on the distance between the centroid position of each group and the particle, and then reclassify the particles based on the degree of belonging to classify multiple particles into multiple types. Such a classification method is described, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 5,555,198, which is incorporated herein by reference. Alternatively, classification based on an AI algorithm may be performed for some particles in a single sample, while classification based on characteristic parameters may be performed for other particles.
プロセッサ301はCPU(Central Processing Unit)であり、記憶部304からメインメモリ302に展開されたプログラムを実行する。記憶部304は、例えばハードディスク、SSD(Solid State Drive)である。記憶部304には、例えば、測定ユニット400を制御するためのプログラム、測定ユニット400が取得したデータを分析するためのプログラムなどが記憶されている。表示部306は、コンピュータスクリーンを備える。表示部306はインターフェース部305とバス303を介してプロセッサ301に電気的に接続されている。表示部306には、例えば、測定ユニット400で取得したデータの分析結果が表示される。 The processor 301 is a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and executes programs loaded from the storage unit 304 into the main memory 302. The storage unit 304 is, for example, a hard disk or an SSD (Solid State Drive). The storage unit 304 stores, for example, programs for controlling the measurement unit 400 and programs for analyzing data acquired by the measurement unit 400. The display unit 306 is equipped with a computer screen. The display unit 306 is electrically connected to the processor 301 via the interface unit 305 and the bus 303. The display unit 306 displays, for example, the analysis results of data acquired by the measurement unit 400.
操作部307は、キーボード、マウス又はタッチパネルを含むポインティングデバイスを備える。医師や検査技師等のユーザは、操作部307を操作することで、測定装置500に測定オーダーを入力できる。測定オーダーにしたがって、測定装置500に測定指示が入力される。操作部307は、ユーザから検査結果を表示する指示を受け付けることもできる。ユーザは、操作部307を操作し、検査結果に関する様々な情報、例えばグラフ、チャート、検体に付与されたフラグ情報を閲覧できる。測定ユニット400は、インターフェース部305を介して分析ユニット300に電気的に接続されている。 The control unit 307 includes a pointing device, such as a keyboard, mouse, or touch panel. Users, such as physicians or laboratory technicians, can input measurement orders into the measuring device 500 by operating the control unit 307. Measurement instructions are then input into the measuring device 500 according to the measurement order. The control unit 307 can also receive instructions from the user to display the test results. Users can operate the control unit 307 to view various information related to the test results, such as graphs, charts, and flag information assigned to the specimen. The measurement unit 400 is electrically connected to the analysis unit 300 via the interface unit 305.
図12を参照して、測定装置500の各ユニットの動作の一例を説明するが、この例に限定されない。分析ユニット300は、例えば、記憶部304からメモリ302に展開されたプログラムをプロセッサ301によって実行することで、対応する動作を実行する。ステップS1において、分析ユニット300は、ユーザからの測定実行の指示を、操作部307を介した入力操作により受け付ける。分析ユニット300は、測定開始を指示する指示データを測定ユニット400へ送信し、測定ユニット400に測定試料の調製処理を開始させる。ステップS2において、測定ユニット400は、検体をチャンバ420に分注する。ステップS3において、測定ユニット400は、試薬容器200とチャンバ420とをつなぐ送液管431を介して、試薬12をチャンバ420に注入する。ステップS2とステップS3の実行順は、入れ替え可能である。ステップS4において、測定ユニット400は、チャンバ420内で、検体と、第1及び第2の蛍光色素を含む試薬12とを混合し、測定試料を調製する。ステップS5において、測定ユニット400は、チャンバ420内で調製した測定試料をFCM検出部460に送液し、測定試料中の複数の粒子に光を照射して光学的測定を実行する。これにより、測定ユニット400は、粒子から生じた各蛍光に対応する第1蛍光信号及び第2蛍光信号を含む光学的信号を取得する。取得した光学的信号は、A/D変換部481a等によってデジタル化され、第1蛍光データの波形データ、第2蛍光データの波形データ等の波形データとして、測定ユニット400から分析ユニット300に送信される。ステップS6において、分析ユニット300は、受信した波形データから、光学的情報を生成する。ステップS7において、分析ユニット300は、光学的情報を分析する。ステップS8において、分析ユニット300は、分析結果を提供する。例えば、分析ユニット300は、分析結果を表示部306に表示する。そして、分析システムは、図12に示される動作を終了する。図12のステップS7の分析処理の詳細を、以下の実施形態ごとに説明する。以下の実施形態では、光学的情報として特徴パラメータを用いる例を説明するが、光学的情報として波形データを用いてもよい。 Referring to Figure 12, an example of the operation of each unit of the measuring device 500 will be described, but it is not limited to this example. The analysis unit 300 performs the corresponding operation by executing a program deployed from the storage unit 304 to the memory 302 using the processor 301. In step S1, the analysis unit 300 receives a measurement execution instruction from the user via an input operation via the operation unit 307. The analysis unit 300 sends instruction data to the measurement unit 400 to instruct the start of measurement, causing the measurement unit 400 to start the preparation process of the measurement sample. In step S2, the measurement unit 400 dispenses the sample into the chamber 420. In step S3, the measurement unit 400 injects the reagent 12 into the chamber 420 via the liquid delivery tube 431 connecting the reagent container 200 and the chamber 420. The execution order of steps S2 and S3 can be changed. In step S4, the measurement unit 400 mixes the sample with the reagent 12 containing the first and second fluorescent dyes in the chamber 420 to prepare a measurement sample. In step S5, the measurement unit 400 sends the measurement sample prepared in the chamber 420 to the FCM detection unit 460 and irradiates multiple particles in the measurement sample with light to perform optical measurement. As a result, the measurement unit 400 acquires an optical signal including a first fluorescence signal and a second fluorescence signal corresponding to each fluorescence generated from the particles. The acquired optical signal is digitized by the A/D conversion unit 481a, etc., and transmitted from the measurement unit 400 to the analysis unit 300 as waveform data, such as waveform data of the first fluorescence data and waveform data of the second fluorescence data. In step S6, the analysis unit 300 generates optical information from the received waveform data. In step S7, the analysis unit 300 analyzes the optical information. In step S8, the analysis unit 300 provides the analysis results. For example, the analysis unit 300 displays the analysis results on the display unit 306. The analysis system then completes the operation shown in Figure 12. The details of the analysis process in step S7 of Figure 12 will be described for each embodiment below. In the following embodiments, an example using feature parameters as optical information is described, but waveform data may also be used as optical information.
ステップS7の分析処理の例として、上述の「蛍光色素の用途例1」につき、実施形態1~4を示す。いずれの実施形態の分析処理においても、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序に関する分析を実行する。「実施形態1」の分析処理では、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光情報、第2蛍光情報及び散乱光情報に基づいて、白血球を亜集団に分類し、当該分類に基づいて白血球の増加機序に関する分析を行う。「実施形態2」の分析処理では、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光情報、第2蛍光情報及び散乱光情報に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する分析を行う。「実施形態3」の分析処理では、分析ユニット300は、第2蛍光情報及び散乱光情報に基づいて、白血球を亜集団に分類する処理と、第1蛍光情報及び第2蛍光情報に基づいて、白血球を亜集団に分類し、当該分類に基づいて白血球の増加機序に関する分析を行う処理と、を実行する。「実施形態4」の分析処理では、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光情報及び第2蛍光情報に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する分析を行う。 As an example of the analysis process in step S7, embodiments 1 to 4 are shown for the "Example of Use of Fluorescent Dye 1" described above. In the analysis process of each embodiment, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase. In the analysis process of "Embodiment 1", the analysis unit 300 classifies leukocytes into subgroups based on the first fluorescence information, the second fluorescence information, and the scattered light information, and performs an analysis related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the classification. In the analysis process of "Embodiment 2", the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the first fluorescence information, the second fluorescence information, and the scattered light information. In the analysis process of "Embodiment 3", the analysis unit 300 performs a process of classifying leukocytes into subgroups based on the second fluorescence information and the scattered light information, and a process of classifying leukocytes into subgroups based on the first fluorescence information and the second fluorescence information, and performing an analysis related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the classification. In the analysis process of "Embodiment 4," the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis of the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the first fluorescence information and the second fluorescence information.
白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性増加の可能性があると分析ユニット300が判断した要因となった白血球を、本明細書において「第1白血球」とも呼ぶ。白血球の増加機序が反応性増加の可能性があると分析ユニット300が判断した要因となった白血球を、本明細書において「第2白血球」とも呼ぶ。第1白血球は、例えば、多発性骨髄腫、慢性リンパ性白血病、悪性リンパ腫などの腫瘍を原因として血液中に出現することがある。第1白血球としては、例えば、異常リンパ球、芽球及び幼若赤芽球が挙げられる。異常リンパ球は、腫瘍性の形態変化をしたリンパ球であり、クローナルで均質な細胞である。芽球は、骨髄芽球及びリンパ芽球を含む。ただし、赤芽球は芽球に含まれない。幼若赤芽球は、前赤芽球、好塩基性赤芽球及び多染性赤芽球を含む。芽球及び幼若赤芽球自体は病的な細胞ではなく、健常者においてはこれらの細胞は主に骨髄中に存在する。分析処理では、第1白血球は、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球に比べてDNAを多く含む白血球として検出される。 In this specification, leukocytes that the analysis unit 300 determined to be factors in the mechanism of leukocyte increase that may be neoplastic increase are also referred to as "first-order leukocytes." In this specification, leukocytes that the analysis unit 300 determined to be factors in the mechanism of leukocyte increase that may be reactive increase are also referred to as "second-order leukocytes." First-order leukocytes may appear in the blood due to tumors such as multiple myeloma, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, and malignant lymphoma. Examples of first-order leukocytes include abnormal lymphocytes, blast cells, and immature erythroblasts. Abnormal lymphocytes are lymphocytes that have undergone neoplastic morphological changes and are clonal and homogeneous cells. Blast cells include myeloblasts and lymphoblasts. However, erythroblasts are not included in blast cells. Immature erythroblasts include proerythroblasts, basophilic erythroblasts, and polychromatic erythroblasts. Blast cells and immature erythroblasts themselves are not pathological cells, and in healthy individuals, these cells are mainly found in the bone marrow. In analytical processing, leukocytes (first-order leukocytes) are detected as leukocytes containing more DNA than other leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
第2白血球は、例えば、ウイルス感染症、薬物アレルギー、自己免疫疾患などによる免疫反応を原因として血液中に出現することがある。第2白血球は、例えば、異型リンパ球である。異型リンパ球は、反応性リンパ球とも呼ばれ、抗原刺激により活性化して形態変化したリンパ球である。分析処理では、第2白血球は、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球に比べてRNAを多く含む白血球として検出される。 Secondary leukocytes (II leukocytes) can appear in the blood as a result of immune responses, such as viral infections, drug allergies, and autoimmune diseases. These II leukocytes are, for example, atypical lymphocytes. Atypical lymphocytes, also known as reactive lymphocytes, are lymphocytes that have been activated and morphologically altered by antigen stimulation. In analytical testing, II leukocytes are detected as white blood cells containing more RNA than other white blood cells such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
図12のステップS7に関して、実施形態1の分析処理の例を、図13を参照して説明するが、この例に限定されない。この分析処理では、白血球の亜集団への分類と、白血球の増加機序に関する分析とを可能にする。この例では、散乱光情報として、側方散乱光情報を用いる。より具体的には、側方散乱光情報として、第1側方散乱光の強度(「SSC-1強度」ともいう)を用いる。SSC-1強度に替えて、第2側方散乱光の強度(「SSC-2強度」ともいう)を用いてもよい。以下、SSC-1強度及びSSC-2強度を総称して、「SSC強度」と呼ぶことがある。第1蛍光情報として、第1蛍光強度(「SF
L-1強度」ともいう)を用い、第2蛍光情報として、第2蛍光強度(「SFL-2強度」ともいう)を用いる。横軸にSSC強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-1強度をとったスキャッタグラムを「第1スキャッタグラム」とも呼ぶ。また、横軸にSSC強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-2強度をとったスキャッタグラムを「第2スキャッタグラム」とも呼ぶ。
Regarding step S7 in Figure 12, an example of the analysis process of Embodiment 1 will be described with reference to Figure 13, but the method is not limited to this example. This analysis process enables the classification of leukocytes into subpopulations and the analysis of the mechanism of leukocyte increase. In this example, lateral scattered light information is used as scattered light information. More specifically, the intensity of the first lateral scattered light (also called "SSC-1 intensity") is used as lateral scattered light information. The intensity of the second lateral scattered light (also called "SSC-2 intensity") may be used instead of the SSC-1 intensity. Hereinafter, the SSC-1 intensity and SSC-2 intensity may be collectively referred to as "SSC intensity". As first fluorescence information, the first fluorescence intensity ("SF
The second fluorescence intensity (also called "SFL-2 intensity") is used as the second fluorescence information. A scattergram with SSC intensity on the x-axis and SFL-1 intensity on the y-axis is also called the "first scattergram." A scattergram with SSC intensity on the x-axis and SFL-2 intensity on the y-axis is also called the "second scattergram."
図13を参照して、ステップS11において、分析ユニット300は、取得した光学的情報に基づいて、横軸にSSC強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-1強度をとった平面上において、各粒子に対応する点の位置を決定する。分析ユニット300は、決定した各点の位置に基づいて、第1スキャッタグラムを作成する。ステップS12において、分析ユニット300は、取得した光学的情報に基づいて、横軸にSSC強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-2強度をとった平面上において、各粒子に対応する点の位置を決定する。分析ユニット300は、決定した各点の位置に基づいて、第2スキャッタグラムを作成する。 Referring to Figure 13, in step S11, the analysis unit 300 determines the position of the point corresponding to each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-1 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. The analysis unit 300 creates a first scattergram based on the determined position of each point. In step S12, the analysis unit 300 determines the position of the point corresponding to each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. The analysis unit 300 creates a second scattergram based on the determined position of each point.
ステップS13において、分析ユニット300は、決定した各点の位置に基づいて、測定試料中の白血球を亜集団に分類する。白血球の亜集団は、例えば、リンパ球集団、単球集団、好中球集団、好酸球集団及び好塩基球集団である。白血球の分類は、これらの亜集団に対応する少なくとも2つ、3つ又は4つの亜集団への分類であってもよい。白血球の亜集団は、好ましくはリンパ球集団を含み、より好ましくはリンパ球集団及び単球集団を含み、さらにより好ましくはリンパ球集団、単球集団及び好中球集団を含む。白血球の各亜集団を検出するアルゴリズム自体は公知である。例えば、分析ユニット300に搭載されたプログラムにより、測定試料中の白血球を亜集団に分類する。また、各亜集団に含まれる白血球を計数してもよい。 In step S13, the analysis unit 300 classifies the leukocytes in the sample into subpopulations based on the determined locations of each point. These subpopulations may include, for example, lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils. The classification of leukocytes may also involve dividing them into at least two, three, or four subpopulations corresponding to these subpopulations. The leukocyte subpopulations preferably include lymphocytes, more preferably include lymphocytes and monocytes, and even more preferably include lymphocytes, monocytes, and neutrophils. The algorithms for detecting each subpopulation of leukocytes are known. For example, a program installed in the analysis unit 300 may classify the leukocytes in the sample into subpopulations. Alternatively, the leukocytes in each subpopulation may be counted.
例えば図14A及びBに示されるように、白血球の各亜集団は、各スキャッタグラム上に分布する。図中、「Lymp」はリンパ球集団を指し、「Mono」は単球集団を指し、「Neut」は好中球集団を指し、「Eo」は好酸球集団を指し、「Baso」は好塩基球集団を指す。図14A及びBでは、白血球の亜集団のみを示し、第1及び第2白血球は示されていない。これらの図では、白血球は、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球及び好塩基球の5種の亜集団に分類されているが、これに限定されない。白血球は、単核細胞、多核細胞の2種の亜集団に分類されてもよい。白血球は、リンパ球、単球及び好中球の3種の亜集団に分類されてもよい。あるいは、白血球は、リンパ球、単球、好中球及び好酸球の4種の亜集団に分類されてもよい。必要に応じて、白血球の各亜集団に含まれる細胞を計数してもよい。図14Aから分かるように、白血球の各亜集団のSFL-1強度の分布範囲はほぼ同様である。これは、白血球の各亜集団のDNA量がほぼ同程度であることを示唆する。図14A及びBでは、第1及び第2スキャッタグラムの両方で白血球を分類したが、いずれか1つのスキャッタグラムにおいて白血球を分類してもよい。好ましくは、第2スキャッタグラムにおいて白血球を分類する。 For example, as shown in Figures 14A and 14B, each subpopulation of leukocytes is distributed on each scattergram. In the figures, "Lymp" refers to the lymphocyte population, "Mono" refers to the monocyte population, "Neut" refers to the neutrophil population, "Eo" refers to the eosinophil population, and "Baso" refers to the basophil population. Figures 14A and 14B show only the subpopulations of leukocytes, and do not show the first and second leukocytes. In these figures, leukocytes are classified into five subpopulations: lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils, but are not limited to these. Leukocytes may also be classified into two subpopulations: mononuclear cells and multinuclear cells. Leukocytes may also be classified into three subpopulations: lymphocytes, monocytes, and neutrophils. Alternatively, leukocytes may be classified into four subpopulations: lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils. If necessary, the cells in each subpopulation of leukocytes may be counted. As can be seen from Figure 14A, the distribution range of SFL-1 intensity in each subpopulation of leukocytes is almost the same. This suggests that the amount of DNA in each subpopulation of leukocytes is approximately the same. In Figures 14A and B, leukocytes are classified using both the first and second scattergrams, but leukocytes may be classified using only one of the scattergrams. Preferably, leukocytes are classified using the second scattergram.
白血球の分類後、プロセスは、図13のステップS14へ進行する。ステップS14において、分析ユニット300は、検出された各粒子のSFL-1強度に基づいて、第1白血球を検出する。具体的には、分析ユニット300は、第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示した粒子を、第1白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、検出された第1白血球を計数する。第1の閾値は、例えば、Lymp、Mono、Baso、Neut、Eoの各々の亜集団に分類された白血球が示すSFL-1強度以上の値である。例えば、第1の閾値は、白血球のいずれかの亜集団(好ましくはリンパ球集団又は単球集
団)のSFL-1強度の最大値又はそれより高い値を設定できる。白血球の亜集団のSFL-1強度の最大値とは、その亜集団に分類された細胞のSFL-1強度のうち、最も高い値をいう。第1の閾値は、例えば、健常者から得た検体(例えば末梢血)を測定し、白血球を上述の亜集団に分類した結果に基づいて予め設定した値であり得る。
After classifying the leukocytes, the process proceeds to step S14 in Figure 13. In step S14, the analysis unit 300 detects the first leukocytes based on the SFL-1 intensity of each detected particle. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold as the first leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first leukocytes. The first threshold is, for example, a value greater than or equal to the SFL-1 intensity exhibited by leukocytes classified into each of the subpopulations of Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo. For example, the first threshold can be set to the maximum value or higher of the SFL-1 intensity of any subpopulation of leukocytes (preferably the lymphocyte subpopulation or the monocyte subpopulation). The maximum value of the SFL-1 intensity of a subpopulation of leukocytes refers to the highest value among the SFL-1 intensities of cells classified into that subpopulation. The first threshold may be a value predetermined based on the results of measuring a sample obtained from a healthy individual (e.g., peripheral blood) and classifying the leukocytes into the aforementioned subpopulations.
ステップS14では、分析ユニット300は、例えば、第1スキャッタグラム上で、SFL-1強度が第1の閾値以上である領域をゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第1白血球として検出することもできる。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。図15を参照して、SFL-1強度が第1の閾値以上である領域は、例えば、第1スキャッタグラム上の破線で囲まれた領域である。この破線で囲まれた領域内には、第1スキャッタグラム上で第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示す粒子が出現し得る。図15中、矢印は、第1の閾値の一例として、白血球のリンパ球集団のSFL-1強度の最大値を示す。図15の例において、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に基づく分析(このような分析を、本明細書において「第1分析」と記載することがある)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、染色特性の違いに応じて染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光色素による第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に対応する第1集団(図15に示される細胞の集団)と、第2蛍光色素による第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に対応する第2集団(後述の図16に示される細胞の集団)と、に分類する。図15及び図16の例では、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に基づくスキャッタグラム(図15の例)と、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に基づくスキャッタグラム(図16の例)によって、細胞を分類している。 In step S14, the analysis unit 300 can, for example, gate the region on the first scattergram where the SFL-1 intensity is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes. Referring to Figure 15, the region where the SFL-1 intensity is greater than or equal to a first threshold is, for example, the region enclosed by the dashed line on the first scattergram. Within this region enclosed by the dashed line, particles showing an SFL-1 intensity greater than the first threshold on the first scattergram may appear. In Figure 15, the arrow indicates the maximum value of the SFL-1 intensity of the lymphocyte population of leukocytes as an example of the first threshold. In the example shown in Figure 15, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on the differences in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the differences in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes (such an analysis may be referred to as "first analysis" in this specification). For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the differences in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 15) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figure 16, described later) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye. In the examples of Figures 15 and 16, the analysis unit 300 classifies the cells using a scattergram based on the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) (example in Figure 15) and a scattergram based on the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) (example in Figure 16).
後述の実施例に示されるように、本発明者らは、腫瘍性の増加機序によって白血球が増加している検体(例えば、異常リンパ球、芽球又は幼若赤芽球を含む検体)では、第1スキャッタグラムにおいて、白血球よりも高いSFL-1強度を示す粒子が出現することを見出した。第1蛍光色素は、DNAに特異的に結合する色素であるので、粒子のSFL-1強度は、当該粒子のDNAに結合した第1蛍光色素の量に依存する。図15から分かるように、破線で囲まれた領域内に出現する粒子(すなわち、第1白血球)は、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球に比べてDNAを多く含む細胞(すなわち、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球よりも多くの第1蛍光色素が結合した細胞)として検出される。図15の例において、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分(図15の例ではDNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(このような分析を、本明細書において「第2分析」と記載することがある)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素で第1の成分(図15の例ではDNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図15の例では、分析ユニット300は、第1の閾値よりも高いSFL-1に対応する細胞を第1白血球として分類し、第1の閾値よりも低いSFL-1に対応する細胞をリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球として分類する。 As shown in the examples described later, the inventors found that in samples in which leukocytes are increased due to a neoplastic mechanism (for example, samples containing abnormal lymphocytes, blast cells, or immature erythroblasts), particles showing a higher SFL-1 intensity than leukocytes appear in the first scattergram. Since the first fluorescent dye is a dye that specifically binds to DNA, the SFL-1 intensity of the particles depends on the amount of the first fluorescent dye bound to the DNA of the particles. As can be seen from Figure 15, particles appearing in the area enclosed by the dashed line (i.e., the first leukocyte) are detected as cells containing more DNA than leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils (i.e., cells to which more of the first fluorescent dye is bound than leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils). In the example shown in Figure 15, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on differences in a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 15) in multiple measured cells (such an analysis may be referred to herein as the "second analysis"). For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 15) into multiple populations according to a first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). In the example of Figure 15, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells corresponding to SFL-1 higher than a first threshold as first leukocytes, and cells corresponding to SFL-1 lower than the first threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
ステップS15において、分析ユニット300は、各粒子のSFL-2強度に基づいて、第2白血球を検出する。具体的には、分析ユニット300は、第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示した粒子を、第2白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。第2の閾値は、例えば、Lymp、Mono、Baso、Neut、Eoの各々の亜集団に分類された白血球が示すSFL-2強度以上の値である。ここで、Lymp、Mono、Baso、Neut、Eo等の白血球の亜集団のうち、単球集団は通常、他の亜集団よりも高いSFL-2強度を示す。よって、第2の閾値は、例えば、白血球の単球集団のSFL-2強度の最大値又はそれより高い値を設定できる。白血球の単球集団のSFL-2強度の最大値とは、単球集団に分類された細胞のSFL-2強度のうち、最も高い値をいう。第2の閾値は、例えば、健常者から得た検体(例えば末梢血)を測定し、白血球を分類した結果に基づいて予め設定した値であり得る。 In step S15, the analysis unit 300 detects secondary leukocytes based on the SFL-2 intensity of each particle. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than a second threshold as secondary leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected secondary leukocytes. The second threshold is, for example, a value greater than or equal to the SFL-2 intensity exhibited by leukocytes classified into each subpopulation of Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo. Here, among the subpopulations of leukocytes such as Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo, the monocyte subpopulation usually exhibits a higher SFL-2 intensity than the other subpopulations. Therefore, the second threshold can be set to, for example, the maximum value of the SFL-2 intensity of the monocyte subpopulation of leukocytes or a higher value. The maximum SFL-2 intensity of the monocyte population of white blood cells refers to the highest SFL-2 intensity among cells classified as monocytes. The second threshold may be a predetermined value based on, for example, the results of measuring and classifying white blood cells from a sample obtained from a healthy individual (e.g., peripheral blood).
ステップS15では、分析ユニット300は、第2スキャッタグラム上で、SFL-2強度が第2の閾値以上である領域をゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第2白血球として検出することもできる。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。図16を参照して、SFL-2強度が第2の閾値以上である領域は、例えば、第2スキャッタグラム上の破線で囲まれた領域である。この破線で囲まれた領域内には、第2スキャッタグラム上で第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示す粒子が出現し得る。図16中、矢印は、第2の閾値の一例として、白血球の単球集団のSFL-2強度の最大値を示す。図16の例において、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分(図16の例ではRNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(このような分析を、本明細書において「第3分析」と記載することがある)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第2蛍光色素で第2の成分(図16の例ではRNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図16の例では、分析ユニット300は、第2の閾値よりも高いSFL-2に対応する細胞を第2白血球として分類し、第2の閾値よりも低いSFL-2に対応する細胞をリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球として分類する。 In step S15, the analysis unit 300 can also gate the region on the second scattergram where the SFL-2 intensity is greater than or equal to the second threshold, and detect particles appearing within that region as second leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected second leukocytes. Referring to Figure 16, the region where the SFL-2 intensity is greater than or equal to the second threshold is, for example, the region enclosed by the dashed line on the second scattergram. Within this dashed region, particles showing an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold on the second scattergram may appear. In Figure 16, the arrow indicates the maximum SFL-2 intensity of the monocyte population of leukocytes as an example of the second threshold. In the example of Figure 16, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on differences in the second component (RNA in the example of Figure 16) in multiple measured cells (such an analysis may be referred to herein as the "third analysis"). For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a second fluorescent dye for a second component (RNA in the example in Figure 16) into multiple groups according to their second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the example in Figure 16, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells corresponding to an SFL-2 higher than the second threshold as second leukocytes, and cells corresponding to an SFL-2 lower than the second threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
後述の実施例に示されるように、本発明者らは、反応性の増加機序で増加した白血球(例えば異型リンパ球)を含む検体では、第2スキャッタグラムにおいて、Lymp、Mono、Baso、Neut、Eo等の亜集団に分類された白血球よりも高いSFL-2強度を示す粒子が多数出現することを見出した。第2蛍光色素は、RNAに対する結合能が高い色素(RNAに対する結合能は第1蛍光色素よりも高い)であるので、粒子のSFL-2強度は、当該粒子のRNAに結合した第2蛍光色素の量に依存する。図16から分かるように、破線で囲まれた領域内に出現する粒子(すなわち、第2白血球)は、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球に比べてRNAを多く含む細胞(すなわち、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球よりも多くの第2蛍光色素が結合した細胞)として検出される。 As shown in the examples described later, the inventors found that in samples containing leukocytes increased by the reactivity-enhancing mechanism (e.g., atypical lymphocytes), a large number of particles exhibiting higher SFL-2 intensity than leukocytes classified into subgroups such as Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo appeared in the second scattergram. Since the second fluorescent dye has a high RNA-binding ability (higher than the first fluorescent dye), the SFL-2 intensity of a particle depends on the amount of the second fluorescent dye bound to the RNA of that particle. As can be seen from Figure 16, particles appearing within the area enclosed by the dashed line (i.e., second leukocytes) are detected as cells containing more RNA than leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils (i.e., cells to which more of the second fluorescent dye is bound than leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils).
ステップS14の変形例として、分析ユニット300は、各粒子のSFL-1強度とSSC強度とに基づいて、第1白血球を特定できる。また、ステップS15の変形例として、分析ユニット300は、各粒子のSFL-2強度とSSC強度とに基づいて、第2白血球を特定できる。本発明者らは、腫瘍性又は反応性の機序で増加した白血球は、単核細胞である場合が多いことを見出した。ここで、側方散乱光情報は、細胞構造の内部情報を反映する情報である。そのため、SFL-1強度又はSFL-2強度に加えて、腫瘍性又は反応性の機序で増加した白血球以外の粒子をSSC強度に基づいて除外することにより、腫瘍性又は反応性の機序で増加した白血球のより正確な検出が可能となる。具体的には、分析ユニット300は、第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示し、かつ第1の範囲内のSSC強度を示した粒子を、第1白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示し、かつ第2の範囲内のSSC強度を示した粒子を、第2白血球として検出する。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1及び第2白血球を計数する。 As a variation of step S14, the analysis unit 300 can identify first leukocytes based on the SFL-1 intensity and SSC intensity of each particle. Also, as a variation of step S15, the analysis unit 300 can identify second leukocytes based on the SFL-2 intensity and SSC intensity of each particle. The inventors have found that leukocytes increased by neoplastic or reactive mechanisms are often mononuclear cells. Here, lateral scattered light information is information that reflects the internal information of the cell structure. Therefore, by excluding particles other than leukocytes increased by neoplastic or reactive mechanisms based on SSC intensity, in addition to SFL-1 intensity or SFL-2 intensity, more accurate detection of leukocytes increased by neoplastic or reactive mechanisms becomes possible. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles that show an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold and an SSC intensity within a first range as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold and an SSC intensity within the second range as second leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first and second leukocytes.
第1の範囲と第2の範囲は同一でもよいし、異なってもよい。本明細書において「第1の範囲内」及び「第2の範囲内」は、各数値範囲の下限の値及び上限の値を含む。第1の範囲及び第2の範囲の下限は、例えば、白血球のリンパ球集団のSSC強度に基づいて決定できる。例えば、第1の範囲及び第2の範囲の下限は、正常白血球のリンパ球集団のSSC強度の最小値、最大値又は代表値であり得る。また、第1の範囲及び第2の範囲の上限は、例えば、白血球の単球集団又は好中球集団のSSC強度に基づいて決定できる。第1の範囲及び第2の範囲の上限は、例えば、正常白血球の単球集団又は好中球集団のSSC強度の最小値、最大値又は代表値であり得る。第1の範囲と第2の範囲は、例えば、健常者から得た検体(例えば末梢血)を測定し、白血球を分類した結果に基づいて、予め設定した数値範囲であり得る。 The first and second ranges may be the same or different. In this specification, "within the first range" and "within the second range" include the lower and upper limits of each numerical range. The lower limits of the first and second ranges can be determined, for example, based on the SSC intensity of the lymphocyte population of leukocytes. For example, the lower limits of the first and second ranges may be the minimum, maximum, or representative value of the SSC intensity of the lymphocyte population of normal leukocytes. The upper limits of the first and second ranges can be determined, for example, based on the SSC intensity of the monocyte population or neutrophil population of leukocytes. For example, the upper limits of the first and second ranges may be the minimum, maximum, or representative value of the SSC intensity of the monocyte population or neutrophil population of normal leukocytes. The first and second ranges may be predetermined numerical ranges based, for example, on the results of measuring and classifying leukocytes in a sample (e.g., peripheral blood) obtained from a healthy individual.
白血球の亜集団のSSC強度の最大値とは、その亜集団に分類された細胞のSSC強度のうち、最も高い値をいう。白血球の亜集団のSSC強度の最小値とは、その亜集団に分類された細胞のSSC強度のうち、最も低い値をいう。白血球の亜集団のSSC強度の統計的代表値とは、その亜集団に分類された細胞のSSC強度から取得される値である。代表値は、例えば中央値、平均値、最頻値、重心値などが挙げられる。SSC強度の重心値とは、スキャッタグラム上に表示された亜集団の重心に位置する点(細胞)のSSC強度をいう。代表値としては、中央値が好ましい。 The maximum SSC intensity of a leukocyte subpopulation refers to the highest SSC intensity among the cells classified into that subpopulation. The minimum SSC intensity of a leukocyte subpopulation refers to the lowest SSC intensity among the cells classified into that subpopulation. The statistical representative value of the SSC intensity of a leukocyte subpopulation is a value obtained from the SSC intensities of the cells classified into that subpopulation. Examples of representative values include the median, mean, mode, and centroid. The centroid of SSC intensity refers to the SSC intensity of the point (cell) located at the centroid of the subpopulation as displayed on the scattergram. The median is preferred as the representative value.
上記のステップS14の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第1スキャッタグラム上で所定の領域をゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第1白血球として検出することもできる。そのような所定の領域は、例えば、SFL-1強度が第1の閾値以上であり、かつSSC強度が第1の範囲内である領域(「ゲートB」とも呼ぶ)である。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。図17を参照して、ゲートBは、第1スキャッタグラム上の破線で囲まれた領域である。ゲートB内には、第1スキャッタグラム上で第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示し、かつ第1の範囲内のSSC強度を示す粒子が出現し得る。図17中、矢印は、第1の閾値の一例として、白血球のリンパ球集団のSFL-1強度の最大値を示す。また、図17中、第1の範囲の一例として、リンパ球集団のSSC強度の代表値以上、かつ好中球集団のSSC強度の代表値以下の範囲を示す。図17の例において、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に基づく分析(第1分析」)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、染色特性の違いに応じて染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光色素による第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に対応する第1集団(図17に示される細胞の集団)と、第2蛍光色素による第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に対応する第2集団(後述の図18に示される細胞の集団)と、に分類する。図17及び図18の例では、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に基づくスキャッタグラム(図17の例)と、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に基づくスキャッタグラム(図18の例)によって、細胞を分類している。図17の例において、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分(図17の例ではDNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第2分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素で第1の成分(図17の例ではDNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図17の例では、分析ユニット300は、SFL-1が第1の閾値よりも高くかつSSCが第1の範囲内である細胞を第1白血球として分類し、第1の閾値よりも低いSFL-1に対応する細胞をリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球として分類する。 In a modified version of step S14 described above, the analysis unit 300 can also gate a predetermined region on the first scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Such a predetermined region is, for example, a region (also called "gate B") where the SFL-1 intensity is above a first threshold and the SSC intensity is within a first range. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes. Referring to Figure 17, gate B is the region enclosed by the dashed line on the first scattergram. Within gate B, particles may appear that show an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold on the first scattergram and an SSC intensity within a first range. In Figure 17, the arrow indicates the maximum SFL-1 intensity of the lymphocyte population of leukocytes as an example of the first threshold. Furthermore, in Figure 17, as an example of the first range, a range is shown that is above the representative value of the SSC intensity of the lymphocyte population and below the representative value of the SSC intensity of the neutrophil population. In the example in Figure 17, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis ("first analysis") based on the difference in staining characteristics of the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics of the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the difference in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 17) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) by the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figure 18, described later) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) by the second fluorescent dye. In the examples in Figures 17 and 18, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells based on a scattergram derived from a first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) (example in Figure 17) and a scattergram derived from a second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) (example in Figure 18). In the example in Figure 17, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (second analysis) based on differences in a first component (DNA in the example in Figure 17) among multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (DNA in the example in Figure 17) into multiple populations according to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). In the example in Figure 17, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells with an SFL-1 higher than a first threshold and SSC within a first range as first leukocytes, and cells corresponding to an SFL-1 lower than the first threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
上記のステップS15の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第2スキャッタグラム上で所定の領域をゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第2白血球として検出することもできる。そのような所定の領域は、例えば、SFL-2強度が第2の閾値以上であり、かつSSC強度が第2の範囲内である領域(「ゲートA」とも呼ぶ)である。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。図18を参照して、ゲートAは、第2スキャッタグラム上の破線で囲まれた領域である。ゲートA内には、第2スキャッタグラム上で第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示し、かつ第2の範囲内のSSC強度を示す粒子が出現し得る。図18中、矢印は、第2の閾値の一例として、白血球の単球集団のSFL-2強度の最大値を示す。また、図18中、第2の範囲の一例として、リンパ球集団のSSC強度の代表値以上、かつ好中球集団のSSC強度の代表値以下の範囲を示す。図18の例において、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分(図18の例ではRNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第3分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第2蛍光色素で第2の成分(図18の例ではRNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図18の例では、分析ユニット300は、SFL-2が第2の閾値よりも高くかつSSCが第2の範囲内である細胞を第2白血球として分類し、第2の閾値よりも低いSFL-2に対応する細胞をリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球として分類する。 In a modified version of step S15 described above, the analysis unit 300 can also gate a predetermined region on the second scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as second leukocytes. Such a predetermined region is, for example, a region where the SFL-2 intensity is above a second threshold and the SSC intensity is within a second range (also called "gate A"). Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected second leukocytes. Referring to Figure 18, gate A is the region enclosed by the dashed line on the second scattergram. Within gate A, particles may appear that show an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold on the second scattergram and an SSC intensity within the second range. In Figure 18, the arrow indicates the maximum SFL-2 intensity of the monocyte population of leukocytes as an example of the second threshold. Furthermore, in Figure 18, an example of the second range is shown, which is above the representative value of the SSC intensity of the lymphocyte population and below the representative value of the SSC intensity of the neutrophil population. In the example in Figure 18, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (third analysis) based on differences in the second component (RNA in the example in Figure 18) in multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with the second fluorescent dye for the second component (RNA in the example in Figure 18) into multiple groups according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the example in Figure 18, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells with SFL-2 higher than the second threshold and SSC within the second range as second leukocytes, and cells corresponding to SFL-2 lower than the second threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
ステップS16において、分析ユニット300は、第1白血球及び第2白血球の検出結果に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を生成する。第1白血球の検出結果は、例えば、ステップS14において検出及び計数した第1白血球の数である。また、第2白血球の検出結果は、例えば、ステップS15において検出及び計数した第2白血球の数である。ステップS16では、分析ユニット300は、第1白血球の数が第3の閾値以上であるかを判定する。また、分析ユニット300は、第2白血球の数が第4の閾値以上であるかを判定する。これらの判定の結果に応じて、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序に関する情報として、検体に含まれる第1白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性増加であることを示す情報、及び検体に含まれる第2白血球の増加機序が反応性増加であることを示す情報を生成できる。判定の条件と生成される情報の例について、図19を参照して以下に説明する。 In step S16, the analysis unit 300 generates information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the detection results of the first and second leukocytes. The detection result for the first leukocytes is, for example, the number of first leukocytes detected and counted in step S14. The detection result for the second leukocytes is, for example, the number of second leukocytes detected and counted in step S15. In step S16, the analysis unit 300 determines whether the number of first leukocytes is above a third threshold. The analysis unit 300 also determines whether the number of second leukocytes is above a fourth threshold. Based on these determinations, the analysis unit 300 can generate information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase, including information indicating that the mechanism of increase of first leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic, and information indicating that the mechanism of increase of second leukocytes in the sample is reactive. The conditions for determination and examples of the generated information are described below with reference to Figure 19.
条件1は、例えば、第1白血球の数が第3の閾値以上であり、かつ第2白血球の数が第4の閾値未満である条件である。条件2は、例えば、第1白血球の数が第3の閾値未満であり、かつ第2白血球の数が第4の閾値以上である条件である。条件3は、例えば、第1白血球の数が第3の閾値未満であり、かつ第2白血球の数が第4の閾値未満である条件である。分析ユニット300は、ステップS14において計数した第1白血球の数とステップS15において計数した第2白血球の数が、条件1~3のいずれを満たすかを判定する。 Condition 1 is, for example, a condition where the number of first white blood cells is equal to or greater than the third threshold, and the number of second white blood cells is less than the fourth threshold. Condition 2 is, for example, a condition where the number of first white blood cells is less than the third threshold, and the number of second white blood cells is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold. Condition 3 is, for example, a condition where the number of first white blood cells is less than the third threshold, and the number of second white blood cells is less than the fourth threshold. The analysis unit 300 determines whether the number of first white blood cells counted in step S14 and the number of second white blood cells counted in step S15 satisfy any of conditions 1 to 3.
第1及び第2白血球の数が条件1を満たすとき、分析ユニット300は、検体に含まれる白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性増加であることを示す情報を生成する。そして、プロセスはステップS8に進行する。ステップS8において、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性増加であることを示す情報として「Malignant?」とのフラグを表示部306に出力する。 When the number of first and second leukocytes satisfies condition 1, the analysis unit 300 generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic. The process then proceeds to step S8. In step S8, the analysis unit 300 outputs a flag "Malignant?" to the display unit 306 as information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes is neoplastic.
第1及び第2白血球の数が条件2を満たすとき、分析ユニット300は、検体に含まれる白血球の増加機序が反応性増加であることを示す情報を生成する。そして、プロセスはステップS8に進行する。ステップS8において、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序が反応性増加であることを示す情報として「Reactive?」とのフラグとを表示部306に出力する。 When the number of first and second leukocytes satisfies condition 2, the analysis unit 300 generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes in the sample is reactive. The process then proceeds to step S8. In step S8, the analysis unit 300 outputs a flag "Reactive?" to the display unit 306 as information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes is reactive.
第1及び第2白血球の数が条件3を満たすとき、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を生成しない。そして、プロセスはステップS8に進行する。ステップS8において、分析ユニット300は、表示部306に、増加機序に関するフラグを出力しない。これは、例えば、腫瘍性及び反応性のいずれかの増加機序に起因する白血球も検体に含まれていなかったことを示す。
第1白血球の数が第3の閾値以上であり、かつ第2白血球の数が第4の閾値以上となる場合も想定される。この場合、例えば、分析ユニット300は、「Malignant?」及び「Reactive?」とは異なるフラグを表示部306に出力してもよいし、フラグを表示部306に出力しなくてもよい。例えば、分析ユニット300は、被検者に何らかの異常が疑われることを示すフラグを表示部306に出力する。例えば、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序の区別が不明であったことを示すフラグ(例えば、「Unknown」)を表示部306に出力してもよい。分析ユニット300は、例えば、「Malignant?」及び「Reactive?」の両方のフラグを表示部306に出力してもよい。
When the number of first and second leukocytes satisfies condition 3, the analysis unit 300 does not generate information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase. The process then proceeds to step S8. In step S8, the analysis unit 300 does not output a flag regarding the mechanism of increase to the display unit 306. This indicates that the sample did not contain leukocytes resulting from either neoplastic or reactive mechanisms of increase, for example.
It is also conceivable that the number of first white blood cells is above the third threshold and the number of second white blood cells is above the fourth threshold. In this case, for example, the analysis unit 300 may output a different flag to the display unit 306 than "Malignant?" and "Reactive?", or it may not output any flag to the display unit 306. For example, the analysis unit 300 may output a flag to the display unit 306 indicating that some abnormality is suspected in the subject. For example, the analysis unit 300 may output a flag to the display unit 306 indicating that the distinction of the mechanism of white blood cell increase was unclear (for example, "Unknown"). The analysis unit 300 may output both the "Malignant?" and "Reactive?" flags to the display unit 306.
第3の閾値及び第4の閾値は、同じであってもよいし、異なってもよい。第3の閾値及び第4の閾値は、適宜決定できる。例えば、健常者から得た検体、増加機序が腫瘍性増加である白血球を含む検体、及び、増加機序が反応性増加である白血球を含む検体の測定により得られた光学的情報のデータを蓄積して、健常者から得た検体と、腫瘍性及び反応性のいずれかの増加機序に起因する白血球を含む検体とを区別可能な値を設定できる。 The third and fourth thresholds may be the same or different. The third and fourth thresholds can be determined as appropriate. For example, by accumulating optical information data obtained from measurements of samples from healthy individuals, samples containing leukocytes whose increase mechanism is neoplastic, and samples containing leukocytes whose increase mechanism is reactive, values can be set to distinguish between samples from healthy individuals and samples containing leukocytes resulting from either neoplastic or reactive increase mechanisms.
図13のステップS16の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第2白血球を検出せず、又は、第2白血球の検出結果を用いずに、第1白血球の検出結果に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する情報として、検体に含まれる白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性増加であることを示す情報を生成する。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第1白血球の数が第3の閾値以上であるかを判定する。第1白血球の数が第3の閾値以上であるとき、分析ユニット300は、検体に含まれる白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性増加であることを示す情報を生成する。そして、プロセスはステップS8に進行する。ステップS8において、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性増加であることを示す情報として「Malignant?」とのフラグを表示部306に出力する。第1白血球の数が第3の閾値未満であるとき、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を生成しない。そして、プロセスはステップS8に進行し、プロセッサ301は、表示部306に、白血球の増加機序に関するフラグを出力しない。 In the modified version of step S16 in Figure 13, the analysis unit 300 does not detect the second leukocyte, or does not use the detection result of the second leukocyte, but generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic, based on the detection result of the first leukocyte. For example, the analysis unit 300 determines whether the number of first leukocytes is above the third threshold. When the number of first leukocytes is above the third threshold, the analysis unit 300 generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes in the sample is neoplastic. The process then proceeds to step S8. In step S8, the analysis unit 300 outputs a flag "Malignant?" to the display unit 306 as information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes is neoplastic. When the number of first leukocytes is below the third threshold, the analysis unit 300 does not generate information regarding the mechanism of increase in leukocytes. The process then proceeds to step S8, and the processor 301 does not output a flag related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase to the display unit 306.
図13のステップS16のさらなる変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第1白血球を検出せず、又は、第1白血球の検出結果を用いずに、第2白血球の検出結果に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する情報として、検体に含まれる白血球の増加機序が反応性増加であることを示す情報を生成する。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第2白血球の数が第4の閾値以上であるかを判定する。第2白血球の数が第4の閾値以上であるとき、分析ユニット300は、検体に含まれる白血球の増加機序が反応性増加であることを示す情報を生成する。そして、プロセスはステップS8に進行する。ステップS8において、プロセッサ301は、白血球の増加機序が反応性増加であることを示す情報として「Reactive?」とのフラグを表示部306に出力する。第2白血球の数が第4の閾値未満であるとき、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を生成しない。そして、プロセスはステップS8に進行し、プロセッサ301は、表示部306に、白血球の増加機序に関するフラグを出力しない。 In a further modification of step S16 in Figure 13, the analysis unit 300 does not detect first leukocytes, or does not use the detection result of first leukocytes, but generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes contained in the sample is reactive, based on the detection result of second leukocytes, as information regarding the mechanism of increase in leukocytes. For example, the analysis unit 300 determines whether the number of second leukocytes is above the fourth threshold. When the number of second leukocytes is above the fourth threshold, the analysis unit 300 generates information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes contained in the sample is reactive. The process then proceeds to step S8. In step S8, the processor 301 outputs a flag "Reactive?" to the display unit 306 as information indicating that the mechanism of increase in leukocytes is reactive. When the number of second leukocytes is below the fourth threshold, the analysis unit 300 does not generate information regarding the mechanism of increase in leukocytes. The process then proceeds to step S8, and the processor 301 does not output a flag related to the mechanism of leukocyte increase to the display unit 306.
実施形態1では、図12のステップS8において、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序に関する情報に加えて、白血球の亜集団に関する情報を提供してもよい。白血球の亜集団に関する情報は、第1蛍光情報(例えばSFL-1強度)と散乱光情報(例えばSSC強度)とに基づく情報であってもよい。また、白血球の亜集団に関する情報は、第2蛍光情報(例えばSFL-2強度)と散乱光情報(例えばSSC強度)とに基づく情報であってもよい。白血球の亜集団に関する情報は、例えば、白血球の各亜集団に含まれる細胞数に関する情報であり得る。そのような情報としては、例えば、白血球の各亜集団について単位量(例えばμL)当たりの細胞数、白血球の総数に対する各亜集団に含まれる細胞数の割合などが挙げられる。 In Embodiment 1, in step S8 of Figure 12, the analysis unit 300 may provide information on leukocyte subpopulations in addition to information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase. Information on leukocyte subpopulations may be based on first fluorescence information (e.g., SFL-1 intensity) and scattered light information (e.g., SSC intensity). Alternatively, information on leukocyte subpopulations may be based on second fluorescence information (e.g., SFL-2 intensity) and scattered light information (e.g., SSC intensity). Information on leukocyte subpopulations may include, for example, information on the number of cells contained in each subpopulation of leukocytes. Such information may include, for example, the number of cells per unit volume (e.g., μL) for each subpopulation of leukocytes, or the ratio of the number of cells in each subpopulation to the total number of leukocytes.
図12のステップS7に関して、実施形態2の分析処理の例を、図20を参照して説明するが、この例に限定されない。この分析処理では、白血球の増加機序に関する情報の生成を可能にする。この例では、散乱光情報として、側方散乱光情報を用いる。より具体的には、側方散乱光情報として、SSC強度を用いる。第1蛍光情報として、SFL-1強度を用い、第2蛍光情報として、SFL-2強度を用いる。 Regarding step S7 in Figure 12, an example of the analysis process in Embodiment 2 will be described with reference to Figure 20, but the method is not limited to this example. This analysis process enables the generation of information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase. In this example, lateral scattered light information is used as the scattered light information. More specifically, SSC intensity is used as the lateral scattered light information. SFL-1 intensity is used as the first fluorescence information, and SFL-2 intensity is used as the second fluorescence information.
図20を参照して、ステップS21において、分析ユニット300は、取得した光学的情報に基づいて、横軸にSSC強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-1強度をとった平面上において、各粒子に対応する点の位置を決定する。決定した各点の位置に基づいて、分析ユニット300は第1スキャッタグラムを作成する。ステップS22において、分析ユニット300は、取得した光学的情報に基づいて、横軸にSSC強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-2強度をとった平面上において、各粒子に対応する点の位置を決定する。決定した各点の位置に基づいて、分析ユニット300は第2スキャッタグラムを作成する。 Referring to Figure 20, in step S21, the analysis unit 300 determines the position of each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-1 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined positions of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a first scattergram. In step S22, the analysis unit 300 determines the position of each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined positions of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a second scattergram.
ステップS23において、分析ユニット300は、第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示した粒子を、第1白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。第1の閾値は上述のとおりである。ステップS23の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第1スキャッタグラム上で、ゲートBをゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第1白血球として検出することもできる。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。ゲーティングによる第1白血球の検出の詳細は、実施形態1のステップS14で述べたことと同様である。 In step S23, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-1 intensity greater than the first threshold as first leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first leukocytes. The first threshold is as described above. In a modified version of step S23, the analysis unit 300 can also gate gate B on the first scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes. The details of the detection of first leukocytes by gating are the same as those described in step S14 of Embodiment 1.
ステップS24において、分析ユニット300は、第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示した粒子を、第2白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。第2の閾値は上述のとおりである。ステップS24の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第2スキャッタグラム上で、ゲートAをゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第2白血球として検出することもできる。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。ゲーティングによる第2白血球の検出の詳細は、実施形態1のステップS15について述べたことと同様である。 In step S24, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold as secondary leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected secondary leukocytes. The second threshold is as described above. In a modified version of step S24, the analysis unit 300 can also gate gate A on the second scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as secondary leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected secondary leukocytes. The details of secondary leukocyte detection by gating are the same as those described in step S15 of Embodiment 1.
ステップS25において、分析ユニット300は、第1白血球及び/又は第2白血球の検出結果に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を生成する。第1白血球の検出結果は、例えば、ステップS23において検出及び計数した第1白血球の数である。また、第2白血球の検出結果は、例えば、ステップS24において検出及び計数した第2白血球の数である。ステップS25は、実施形態1のステップS16について述べたことと同様である。 In step S25, the analysis unit 300 generates information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the detection results of first leukocytes and/or second leukocytes. The detection result for first leukocytes is, for example, the number of first leukocytes detected and counted in step S23. The detection result for second leukocytes is, for example, the number of second leukocytes detected and counted in step S24. Step S25 is the same as described for step S16 of Embodiment 1.
図12のステップS7に関して、実施形態3の分析処理の例を、図21を参照して説明するが、この例に限定されない。この分析処理では、第2スキャッタグラム上での白血球の亜集団への分類と、白血球の増加機序に関する情報の生成とを可能にする。この例では、散乱光情報として、側方散乱光情報を用いる。より具体的には、側方散乱光情報として、SSC強度を用いる。第1蛍光情報として、SFL-1強度を用い、第2蛍光情報として、SFL-2強度を用いる。 Regarding step S7 in Figure 12, an example of the analysis process of Embodiment 3 will be described with reference to Figure 21, but the method is not limited to this example. This analysis process enables the classification of leukocytes into subpopulations on the second scattergram and the generation of information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase. In this example, lateral scattered light information is used as the scattered light information. More specifically, SSC intensity is used as the lateral scattered light information. SFL-1 intensity is used as the first fluorescence information, and SFL-2 intensity is used as the second fluorescence information.
図21を参照して、ステップS31において、分析ユニット300は、取得した光学的情報に基づいて、横軸にSSC強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-2強度をとった平面上において、各粒子に対応する点の位置を決定する。決定した各点の位置に基づいて、分析ユニット300は第2スキャッタグラムを作成する。ステップS32において、分析ユニット300は、決定した各点の位置に基づいて、測定試料中の粒子から白血球を亜集団に分類する。白血球の分類及び計数の詳細は、ステップS13で述べたことと同様である。図21の例において、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に基づく分析(第1分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、染色特性の違いに応じて染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光色素による第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)を横軸とし、第2蛍光色素による第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)を縦軸とするスキャッタグラム上にプロットする。図21に図示はされていないが、検体中に第1白血球及び第2白血球の少なくとも一方が出現していれば、第1白血球及び第2白血球も図21のスキャッタグラム上にプロットされる。図21のスキャッタグラム上での各細胞は、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に対応する位置にプロットされる。 Referring to Figure 21, in step S31, the analysis unit 300 determines the position of a point corresponding to each particle on a plane with SSC intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined position of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a second scattergram. In step S32, the analysis unit 300 classifies leukocytes into subpopulations from the particles in the measurement sample based on the determined position of each point. The details of leukocyte classification and counting are the same as those described in step S13. In the example in Figure 21, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (first analysis) based on the difference in staining characteristics of the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics of the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye. For example, the analysis unit 300 plots multiple cells stained according to differences in staining characteristics on a scattergram with the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye on the x-axis and the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye on the y-axis. Although not shown in Figure 21, if at least one of the first and second leukocytes is present in the sample, the first and second leukocytes are also plotted on the scattergram in Figure 21. Each cell on the scattergram in Figure 21 is plotted at a position corresponding to the difference in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes.
ステップS33において、分析ユニット300は、取得した光学的情報に基づいて、横軸にSFL-1強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-2強度をとった平面上において、各粒子に対応する点の位置を決定する。決定した各点の位置に基づいて、分析ユニット300は第3スキャッタグラムを作成する。第3スキャッタグラムにおいて、Lymp、Mono、Baso、Neut、Eo等の白血球の各亜集団は、ほぼ同じか又は互いに近接した位置に出現する。そのため、第3スキャッタグラムでは、白血球の各亜集団に対応するクラスターは表示されず、例えば図22に示されるように、白血球の一群として表示される。図中、「WBC」は白血球を指す。 In step S33, the analysis unit 300 determines the position of each particle on a plane with SFL-1 intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined position of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a third scattergram. In the third scattergram, each subpopulation of leukocytes, such as Lymp, Mono, Baso, Neut, and Eo, appears at approximately the same or close proximity to each other. Therefore, in the third scattergram, clusters corresponding to each subpopulation of leukocytes are not displayed; instead, they are displayed as a group of leukocytes, as shown in Figure 22, for example. In the figure, "WBC" refers to leukocytes.
ステップS34において、分析ユニット300は、各粒子のSFL-1強度に基づいて、第1白血球を検出する。具体的には、分析ユニット300は、第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示した粒子を、第1白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。第1の閾値については、上述のとおりである。 In step S34, the analysis unit 300 detects first leukocytes based on the SFL-1 intensity of each particle. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold as first leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first leukocytes. The first threshold is as described above.
ステップS34では、分析ユニット300は、例えば、第3スキャッタグラム上で、SFL-1強度が第1の閾値以上である領域をゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第1白血球として検出することもできる。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。図23を参照して、SFL-1強度が第1の閾値以上である領域は、例えば、第3スキャッタグラム上の破線で囲まれた領域である。この破線で囲まれた領域内には、第3スキャッタグラム上で第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示す粒子が出現し得る。図23の例では、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分(図23の例ではDNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第2分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素で第1の成分(図23の例ではDNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図23の例では、分析ユニット300は、第1の閾値よりも高いSFL-1に対応する細胞を第1白血球として分類し、第1の閾値よりも低いSFL-1に対応する細胞をリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球として分類する。 In step S34, the analysis unit 300 can, for example, gate the region on the third scattergram where the SFL-1 intensity is greater than or equal to a first threshold, and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes. Referring to Figure 23, the region where the SFL-1 intensity is greater than or equal to a first threshold is, for example, the region enclosed by the dashed line on the third scattergram. Within this region enclosed by the dashed line, particles showing an SFL-1 intensity greater than the first threshold on the third scattergram may appear. In the example of Figure 23, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (second analysis) based on differences in a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 23) in multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 23) into multiple groups according to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). In the example shown in Figure 23, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells corresponding to SFL-1 levels higher than the first threshold as primary leukocytes, and cells corresponding to SFL-1 levels lower than the first threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
ステップS35において、分析ユニット300は、各粒子のSFL-2強度に基づいて、第2白血球を検出する。具体的には、分析ユニット300は、第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示した粒子を、第2白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。第2の閾値については、上述のとおりである。 In step S35, the analysis unit 300 detects secondary leukocytes based on the SFL-2 intensity of each particle. Specifically, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold as secondary leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected secondary leukocytes. The second threshold is as described above.
ステップS35では、分析ユニット300は、例えば、第3スキャッタグラム上で、SFL-2強度が第2の閾値以上である領域をゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第2白血球として検出することもできる。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。図24を参照して、SFL-2強度が第2の閾値以上である領域は、例えば、第3スキャッタグラム上の破線で囲まれた領域である。この破線で囲まれた領域内には、第3スキャッタグラム上で第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示す粒子が出現し得る。図24の例において、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分(図24の例ではRNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第3分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第2蛍光色素で第2の成分(図24の例ではRNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図24の例では、分析ユニット300は、第2の閾値よりも高いSFL-2に対応する細胞を第2白血球として分類し、第2の閾値よりも低いSFL-2に対応する細胞をリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等の白血球として分類する。 In step S35, the analysis unit 300 can, for example, gate the region on the third scattergram where the SFL-2 intensity is greater than or equal to the second threshold, and detect particles appearing within that region as second leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected second leukocytes. Referring to Figure 24, the region where the SFL-2 intensity is greater than or equal to the second threshold is, for example, the region enclosed by the dashed line on the third scattergram. Within this region enclosed by the dashed line, particles showing an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold on the third scattergram may appear. In the example of Figure 24, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (third analysis) based on differences in the second component (RNA in the example of Figure 24) in multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with the second fluorescent dye for the second component (RNA in the example of Figure 24) into multiple groups according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the example shown in Figure 24, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells corresponding to SFL-2 levels higher than the second threshold as second leukocytes, and cells corresponding to SFL-2 levels lower than the second threshold as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, and basophils.
上記のステップS34の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第3スキャッタグラム上で所定の領域をゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第1白血球として検出することもできる。そのような所定の領域は、SFL-1強度が第1の閾値以上であり、かつSFL-2強度が所定の閾値以下である領域(「ゲートD」とも呼ぶ)である。SFL-2強度に対応する所定の閾値は、例えば、第2の閾値である。SFL-2強度に対応する所定の閾値は、例えば、第2の閾値とは異なる第3の閾値でもよい。第3の閾値は、例えば、第2の閾値よりも低いSFL-2強度である。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。この例では、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分(この例ではDNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第2分析)と、測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分(この例ではRNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第3分析)を行っている。分析ユニット300は、SFL-1強度が第1の閾値以上であり、かつSFL-2強度が所定の閾値以下である領域(ゲートD)に出現した細胞を第1白血球として分類し、ゲートD外の細胞をリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等(第2白血球を含む場合もある)の白血球として分類する。 In a modified version of step S34 described above, the analysis unit 300 can also gate a predetermined region on the third scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Such a predetermined region is a region (also called "gate D") where the SFL-1 intensity is above a first threshold and the SFL-2 intensity is below a predetermined threshold. The predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-2 intensity is, for example, a second threshold. The predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-2 intensity may also be, for example, a third threshold different from the second threshold. The third threshold is, for example, an SFL-2 intensity lower than the second threshold. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes. In this example, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on differences in a first component (DNA in this example) in multiple measured cells (second analysis) and an analysis based on differences in a second component (RNA in this example) in multiple measured cells (third analysis). The analysis unit 300 classifies cells appearing in the region (gate D) where the SFL-1 intensity is above a first threshold and the SFL-2 intensity is below a predetermined threshold as primary leukocytes, and classifies cells outside gate D as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, basophils, etc. (sometimes including secondary leukocytes).
上記のステップS35の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第3スキャッタグラム上で、ゲートDとは異なる所定の領域をゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第2白血球として検出することもできる。そのような所定の領域は、SFL-1強度が所定の閾値以上であり、かつSFL-2強度が第2の閾値より高い領域(「ゲートC」とも呼ぶ)である。SFL-1強度に対応する所定の閾値は、例えば、第1の閾値である。SFL-1強度に対応する所定の閾値は、例えば、第1の閾値とは異なる第4の閾値でもよい。第4の閾値は、例えば、第1の閾値よりも低いSFL-1強度である。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。この例では、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分(この例ではDNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第2分析)と、測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分(この例ではRNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第3分析)を行っている。分析ユニット300は、SFL-1強度が所定の閾値以上であり、かつ、SFL-2強度が第2の閾値より高い領域(ゲートC)に出現した細胞を第2白血球として分類し、ゲートC外の細胞をリンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球、好塩基球等(第1白血球を含む場合も)の白血球として分類する。 In a modified version of step S35 described above, the analysis unit 300 can also gate a predetermined region on the third scattergram that is different from gate D, and detect particles appearing in that region as second leukocytes. Such a predetermined region is a region (also called "gate C") where the SFL-1 intensity is above a predetermined threshold and the SFL-2 intensity is higher than the second threshold. The predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-1 intensity is, for example, the first threshold. The predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-1 intensity may also be, for example, a fourth threshold different from the first threshold. The fourth threshold is, for example, an SFL-1 intensity lower than the first threshold. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected second leukocytes. In this example, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis based on differences in a first component (DNA in this example) in multiple measured cells (second analysis) and an analysis based on differences in a second component (RNA in this example) in multiple measured cells (third analysis). The analysis unit 300 classifies cells appearing in the region (gate C) where the SFL-1 intensity is above a predetermined threshold and the SFL-2 intensity is higher than a second threshold as secondary leukocytes, and classifies cells outside gate C as leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, eosinophils, basophils, etc. (sometimes including primary leukocytes).
図25を参照して、ゲートCは、第3スキャッタグラム上の実線で囲まれた領域であり、ゲートDは、第3スキャッタグラム上の破線で囲まれた領域である。ゲートC内には、第3スキャッタグラム上で所定の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示し、かつ第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示す粒子が出現し得る。ゲートCにおいて、SFL-1強度に対応する所定の閾値は、上述した例と同様である。ゲートD内には、第3スキャッタグラム上で第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示し、かつ所定の閾値以下のSFL-2強度を示す粒子が出現し得る。ゲートDにおいて、SFL-2強度に対応する所定の閾値は、上述した例と同様である。 Referring to Figure 25, gate C is the region enclosed by the solid line on the third scattergram, and gate D is the region enclosed by the dashed line on the third scattergram. Within gate C, particles may appear that exhibit an SFL-1 intensity greater than a predetermined threshold and an SFL-2 intensity greater than a second threshold on the third scattergram. In gate C, the predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-1 intensity is the same as in the example described above. Within gate D, particles may appear that exhibit an SFL-1 intensity greater than a first threshold and an SFL-2 intensity less than or equal to a predetermined threshold on the third scattergram. In gate D, the predetermined threshold corresponding to the SFL-2 intensity is the same as in the example described above.
ステップS36において、分析ユニット300は、第1白血球及び第2白血球の検出結果に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を生成する。第1白血球の検出結果は、例えば、ステップS34において検出及び計数した第1白血球の数である。また、第2白血球の検出結果は、例えば、ステップS35において検出及び計数した第2白血球の数である。ステップS36は、実施形態1のステップS16について述べたことと同様である。 In step S36, the analysis unit 300 generates information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the detection results of the first and second leukocytes. The detection result for the first leukocytes is, for example, the number of first leukocytes detected and counted in step S34. The detection result for the second leukocytes is, for example, the number of second leukocytes detected and counted in step S35. Step S36 is the same as described for step S16 of Embodiment 1.
実施形態3では、図12のステップS8において、分析ユニット300は、白血球の増加機序に関する情報に加えて、白血球の亜集団に関する情報を出力してもよい。白血球の亜集団に関する情報は、上述のとおりである。 In Embodiment 3, in step S8 of Figure 12, the analysis unit 300 may output information on subpopulations of leukocytes in addition to information on the mechanism of leukocyte increase. The information on subpopulations of leukocytes is as described above.
図12のステップS7に関して、実施形態4の分析処理の例を、図26を参照して説明するが、この例に限定されない。この分析処理では、白血球の増加機序に関する情報の生成を可能にする。この例では、第1蛍光情報として、SFL-1強度を用い、第2蛍光情報として、SFL-2強度を用いる。ステップS41において、分析ユニット300は、取得した光学的情報に基づいて、横軸にSFL-1強度をとり、縦軸にSFL-2強度をとった平面上において、各粒子に対応する点の位置を決定する。決定した各点の位置に基づいて、分析ユニット300は第3スキャッタグラムを作成する。 Regarding step S7 in Figure 12, an example of the analysis process of Embodiment 4 will be described with reference to Figure 26, but the process is not limited to this example. This analysis process enables the generation of information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase. In this example, SFL-1 intensity is used as the first fluorescence information, and SFL-2 intensity is used as the second fluorescence information. In step S41, the analysis unit 300 determines the position of the point corresponding to each particle on a plane with SFL-1 intensity on the horizontal axis and SFL-2 intensity on the vertical axis, based on the acquired optical information. Based on the determined position of each point, the analysis unit 300 creates a third scattergram.
ステップS42において、分析ユニット300は、第1の閾値より大きいSFL-1強度を示した粒子を、第1白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。第1の閾値は上述のとおりである。ステップS42の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第3スキャッタグラム上で、ゲートDをゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第1白血球として検出することもできる。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第1白血球を計数する。ゲーティングによる第1白血球の検出の詳細は、実施形態3のステップS34で述べたことと同様である。 In step S42, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-1 intensity greater than the first threshold as first leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected first leukocytes. The first threshold is as described above. In a modified version of step S42, the analysis unit 300 can also gate gate D on the third scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as first leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected first leukocytes. The details of the detection of first leukocytes by gating are the same as those described in step S34 of Embodiment 3.
ステップS43において、分析ユニット300は、第2の閾値より大きいSFL-2強度を示した粒子を、第2白血球として検出する。また、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。第2の閾値は上述のとおりである。ステップS43の変形例では、分析ユニット300は、第3スキャッタグラム上で、ゲートCをゲーティングし、当該領域内に出現した粒子を第2白血球として検出することもできる。さらに、分析ユニット300は、検出した第2白血球を計数する。ゲーティングによる第2白血球の検出の詳細は、実施形態3のステップS35について述べたことと同様である。 In step S43, the analysis unit 300 detects particles exhibiting an SFL-2 intensity greater than the second threshold as secondary leukocytes. The analysis unit 300 also counts the detected secondary leukocytes. The second threshold is as described above. In a modified version of step S43, the analysis unit 300 can also gate gate C on the third scattergram and detect particles appearing within that region as secondary leukocytes. Furthermore, the analysis unit 300 counts the detected secondary leukocytes. The details of secondary leukocyte detection by gating are the same as those described in step S35 of Embodiment 3.
ステップS44において、分析ユニット300は、第1白血球及び/又は第2白血球の検出結果に基づいて、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を生成する。第1白血球の検出結果は、例えば、ステップS42において検出及び計数した第1白血球の数である。また、第2白血球の検出結果は、例えば、ステップS43において検出及び計数した第2白血球の数である。ステップS44は、実施形態1のステップS16について述べたことと同様である。 In step S44, the analysis unit 300 generates information regarding the mechanism of leukocyte increase based on the detection results of first leukocytes and/or second leukocytes. The detection result for first leukocytes is, for example, the number of first leukocytes detected and counted in step S42. The detection result for second leukocytes is, for example, the number of second leukocytes detected and counted in step S43. Step S44 is the same as described for step S16 of Embodiment 1.
図12のステップS7の例として、上述の「蛍光色素の用途例2」における分析処理の例を説明する。以下で説明される分析処理の例において、第1蛍光情報として、第1蛍光強度(「SFL-1強度」ともいう)が用いられ、第2蛍光情報として、第2蛍光強度(「SFL-2強度」ともいう)が用いられる。横軸か縦軸のいずれか一方にSFL-1強度をとったスキャッタグラムを「第1スキャッタグラム」とも呼ぶ。また、横軸か縦軸のいずれか一方にSFL-2強度をとったスキャッタグラムを「第2スキャッタグラム」とも呼ぶ。 As an example of step S7 in Figure 12, an example of the analytical processing described in "Example 2 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above will be explained. In the example of analytical processing described below, the first fluorescence intensity (also called "SFL-1 intensity") is used as the first fluorescence information, and the second fluorescence intensity (also called "SFL-2 intensity") is used as the second fluorescence information. A scattergram with SFL-1 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "first scattergram." Similarly, a scattergram with SFL-2 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "second scattergram."
図27及び図28に、上述の「蛍光色素の用途例2」の分析処理における第1スキャッタグラム及び第2スキャッタグラムの例を示す。図27に示すように、DNAへの結合能がRNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素に対応するSFL-1を横軸にとった第1スキャッタグラムでは、DNAを有する血小板のクラスターがスキャッタグラム上に出現するが、DNAが僅か若しくはDNAを有さない網赤血球はスキャッタグラム上では明確なクラスターとして出現していない。一方、図28に示すように、RNAへの結合能がDNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素に対応するSFL-2を横軸にとった第2スキャッタグラムでは、RNAを有する網赤血球のクラスターがスキャッタグラム上に出現し、血小板のクラスターはSFL-2及びFSCの低値側に僅かしか出現しない。第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素は、細胞に対する染色特性、及び、蛍光特性が互いに異なる。このような蛍光色素を用いることで、図27及び図28に示すように、1つの測定チャネルによる測定動作によって、RETとPLTとを互いに区別して分析することが可能となる。 Figures 27 and 28 show examples of the first and second scattergrams in the analytical process described in "Example 2 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above. As shown in Figure 27, in the first scattergram with SFL-1, which corresponds to the first fluorescent dye whose binding ability to DNA is superior to its binding ability to RNA, on the horizontal axis, clusters of platelets containing DNA appear on the scattergram, but reticulocytes with little or no DNA appear as clear clusters on the scattergram. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 28, in the second scattergram with SFL-2, which corresponds to the second fluorescent dye whose binding ability to RNA is superior to its binding ability to DNA, on the horizontal axis, clusters of reticulocytes containing RNA appear on the scattergram, and clusters of platelets appear only slightly on the lower side of SFL-2 and FSC. The first and second fluorescent dyes have different staining characteristics and fluorescence characteristics for cells. By using such fluorescent dyes, as shown in Figures 27 and 28, it becomes possible to distinguish and analyze RET and PLT using a single measurement channel.
図27及び28の例において、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に基づく分析(第1分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、染色特性の違いに応じて染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光色素による第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に対応する第1集団(図27に示される細胞の集団)と、第2蛍光色素による第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に対応する第2集団(図28に示される細胞の集団)と、に分類する。図27及び図28の例では、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に基づくスキャッタグラム(図27の例)と、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に基づくスキャッタグラム(図28の例)によって、細胞を分類している。 In the examples shown in Figures 27 and 28, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (first analysis) based on the differences in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the differences in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the differences in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 27) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figure 28) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye. In the examples of Figures 27 and 28, the analysis unit 300 classifies the cells using a scattergram based on the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) (example in Figure 27) and a scattergram based on the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) (example in Figure 28).
図27の例では、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分(図27の例ではDNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第2分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素で第1の成分(図27の例ではDNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図27の例では、分析ユニット300は、例えば、図27のスキャッタグラムにおいて、DNAに対する結合能を有する第1蛍光色素で染色された血小板のクラスターに基づいて血小板を検出する。DNAが僅か若しくはDNAを有さないために網赤血球(RET)は、図27のスキャッタグラムには出現していない。これにより、分析ユニット300は、図27のスキャッタグラムに例示された分析によって、血小板と網赤血球を分類する。 In the example shown in Figure 27, the analysis unit 300 performs a second analysis based on differences in a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 27) among multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (DNA in the example of Figure 27) into multiple populations according to their first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). In the example of Figure 27, the analysis unit 300 detects platelets based on clusters of platelets stained with the first fluorescent dye that has the ability to bind to DNA, for example, in the scattergram of Figure 27. Reticulocytes (RETs), which have little or no DNA, do not appear in the scattergram of Figure 27. Thus, the analysis unit 300 classifies platelets and reticulocytes by the analysis exemplified in the scattergram of Figure 27.
図28の例では、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分(図28の例ではRNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第3分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第2蛍光色素で第2の成分(図28の例ではRNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図28の例では、分析ユニット300は、例えば、図28のスキャッタグラムにおいて、RNAに対する結合能を有する第2蛍光色素で染色された網赤血球のクラスターに基づいて網赤血球を検出する。RNAに対する結合能を有する第2蛍光色素が結合しにくい血小板は、図28のスキャッタグラムで僅かしか出現せず、RETのクラスターとも重複しない。これにより、分析ユニット300は、図28のスキャッタグラムに例示された分析によって、血小板と網赤血球を分類する。 In the example shown in Figure 28, the analysis unit 300 performs a third analysis based on differences in a second component (RNA in the example of Figure 28) among multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a second fluorescent dye for a second component (RNA in the example of Figure 28) into multiple populations according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the example of Figure 28, the analysis unit 300 detects reticulocytes based on clusters of reticulocytes stained with the second fluorescent dye that has RNA-binding ability in the scattergram of Figure 28. Platelets, which do not readily bind to the second fluorescent dye that has RNA-binding ability, appear only faintly in the scattergram of Figure 28 and do not overlap with the RET cluster. Thus, the analysis unit 300 classifies platelets and reticulocytes by the analysis exemplified in the scattergram of Figure 28.
図12のステップS7の例として、上述の「蛍光色素の用途例3」における分析処理の例を説明する。以下で説明される分析処理の例において、第1蛍光情報として、第1蛍光強度(「SFL-1強度」ともいう)が用いられ、第2蛍光情報として、第2蛍光強度(「SFL-2強度」ともいう)が用いられる。横軸か縦軸のいずれか一方にSFL-1強度をとったスキャッタグラムを「第1スキャッタグラム」とも呼ぶ。また、横軸か縦軸のいずれか一方にSFL-2強度をとったスキャッタグラムを「第2スキャッタグラム」とも呼ぶ。 As an example of step S7 in Figure 12, an example of the analytical processing described in "Example 3 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above will be explained. In the example of analytical processing described below, the first fluorescence intensity (also called "SFL-1 intensity") is used as the first fluorescence information, and the second fluorescence intensity (also called "SFL-2 intensity") is used as the second fluorescence information. A scattergram with SFL-1 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "first scattergram." Similarly, a scattergram with SFL-2 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "second scattergram."
図29、図30及び図31に、上述の「蛍光色素の用途例3」の分析処理における第1スキャッタグラム及び第2スキャッタグラムの例を示す。図29に、核小体への結合能がRNAに対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素に対応するSFL-1を縦軸にとった第1スキャッタグラムを示す。第1スキャッタグラムでは、核小体を有する芽球及び前骨髄球が白血球よりも高値側に出現している。芽球(Blast)と前骨髄球(Promyelocyte)とは含まれる核小体の量が異なっていることから、芽球の核小体に結合する第1蛍光色素の量と、前骨髄球の核小体に結合する第1蛍光色素の量は異なる。結合した第1蛍光色素の量の違いは、芽球及び前骨髄球の各々に対応する蛍光信号強度の違いに現れる。よって、蛍光強度に基づいて、芽球のクラスターと前骨髄球のクラスターとが第1スキャッタグラム上に現れる。一方、図30に示すように、RNAへの結合能が核小体に対する結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素に対応するSFL-2を縦軸にとった第2スキャッタグラムでは、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球等の成熟した白血球の各々に対応するクラスターが現れている。なお、芽球及びそれ以外の幼若顆粒球(前骨髄球)が含まれる検体における第2スキャッタグラムでは、図31に示すように、成熟した白血球のクラスターの一部と重なった領域に、芽球及びそれ以外の幼若顆粒球のクラスターが出現し、そのクラスターでは芽球と前骨髄球とが弁別できない場合がある。第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素は、細胞に対する染色特性、及び、蛍光特性が互いに異なる。このような蛍光色素を用いることで、図29に示すように、1つの測定チャネルによる測定動作によって、芽球と前骨髄球とを互いに区別して分析することが可能となる。 Figures 29, 30, and 31 show examples of the first and second scattergrams in the analytical process described in "Example 3 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above. Figure 29 shows the first scattergram with SFL-1, which corresponds to the first fluorescent dye whose nucleolus binding ability is superior to its RNA binding ability, on the vertical axis. In the first scattergram, blast cells and promyelocytes, which contain nucleoli, appear at higher values than leukocytes. Since blast cells and promyelocytes contain different amounts of nucleoli, the amount of the first fluorescent dye that binds to the nucleoli of blast cells is different from the amount that binds to the nucleoli of promyelocytes. The difference in the amount of bound first fluorescent dye is reflected in the difference in fluorescence signal intensity corresponding to blast cells and promyelocytes, respectively. Therefore, clusters of blast cells and clusters of promyelocytes appear on the first scattergram based on fluorescence intensity. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 30, in the second scattergram with SFL-2, which corresponds to the second fluorescent dye whose ability to bind to RNA is superior to its ability to bind to the nucleolus, plotted on the vertical axis, clusters corresponding to mature leukocytes such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils appear. However, in the second scattergram of a sample containing blast cells and other immature granulocytes (promyelocytes), as shown in Figure 31, clusters of blast cells and other immature granulocytes appear in regions overlapping with some of the mature leukocyte clusters, and in such clusters, it may be impossible to distinguish between blast cells and promyelocytes. The first and second fluorescent dyes have different staining and fluorescence properties for cells. By using such fluorescent dyes, as shown in Figure 29, it becomes possible to distinguish and analyze blast cells and promyelocytes using a single measurement channel.
図29と、図30及び31の例において、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に基づく分析(第1分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、染色特性の違いに応じて染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光色素による第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に対応する第1集団(図29に示される細胞の集団)と、第2蛍光色素による第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に対応する第2集団(図30及び31に示される細胞の集団)と、に分類する。図31の例に示されるように、検体に芽球及び前骨髄球の少なくともいずれかが出現する場合、分析ユニット300は、リンパ球、単球等の他の白血球と、芽球及び前骨髄球の少なくともいずれかを分類することが難しい。よって、分析ユニット300は、例えば、リンパ球、単球、好中球、好酸球等の成熟した白血球を分類するために、図30のスキャッタグラムで細胞を分類し、芽球及び前骨髄球の少なくともいずれかが出現する検体ついて、芽球及び前骨髄球の少なくともいずれかと成熟した白血球を分類するために、図29のスキャッタグラムで細胞を分類する。 In the examples in Figures 29 and 30 and 31, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (first analysis) based on the difference in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the difference in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 29) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figures 30 and 31) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye. As shown in the example in Figure 31, if at least one of blast cells and promyelocytes appears in the sample, it is difficult for the analysis unit 300 to classify at least one of the blast cells and promyelocytes from other leukocytes such as lymphocytes and monocytes. Therefore, the analysis unit 300 classifies cells using the scattergram shown in Figure 30 to classify mature white blood cells such as lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and eosinophils, and for samples in which at least one of blast cells and promyelocytes appears, it classifies cells using the scattergram shown in Figure 29 to classify at least one of the blast cells and promyelocytes from mature white blood cells.
図29の例では、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分(図29の例では核小体)に関する違いに基づく分析(第2分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素で第1の成分(図29の例では核小体)が染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図29の例では、分析ユニット300は、芽球と前骨髄球の間での核小体に関する違いを反映した第1蛍光強度に基づいて、芽球と前骨髄球を分類する。分析ユニット300は、例えば、前骨髄球よりも核小体を多く含む芽球には第1蛍光色素がより多く結合し、第1蛍光強度も前骨髄球よりも高くなることに基づいて、芽球と前骨髄球のクラスターを分類する。 In the example in Figure 29, the analysis unit 300 performs a second analysis based on differences in a first component (nucleolus in the example in Figure 29) in multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a first fluorescent dye for a first component (nucleolus in the example in Figure 29) into multiple populations according to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). In the example in Figure 29, the analysis unit 300 classifies blast cells and promyelocytes based on the first fluorescence intensity, which reflects the difference in nucleolus between blast cells and promyelocytes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies clusters of blast cells and promyelocytes based on the fact that blast cells, which contain more nucleolus than promyelocytes, bind more of the first fluorescent dye, and their first fluorescence intensity is higher than that of promyelocytes.
図30及び31の例では、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分(図30及び31の例ではRNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第3分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第2蛍光色素で第2の成分(図30及び31の例ではRNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図30及び31の例では、分析ユニット300は、リンパ球、単球等の成熟した白血球の間のRNAに関する違いに基づいて、成熟した白血球を分類する。分析ユニット300は、例えば、成熟した白血球の間でのRNAに関する違いを反映した第2蛍光強度の違いに基づいて、成熟した白血球を分類する。 In the examples of Figures 30 and 31, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (third analysis) based on differences in a second component (RNA in the examples of Figures 30 and 31) in multiple measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a second fluorescent dye for a second component (RNA in the examples of Figures 30 and 31) into multiple populations according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the examples of Figures 30 and 31, the analysis unit 300 classifies mature leukocytes based on differences in RNA among mature leukocytes such as lymphocytes and monocytes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies mature leukocytes based on differences in the second fluorescence intensity that reflect differences in RNA among mature leukocytes.
図12のステップS7の例として、上述の「蛍光色素の用途例4」における分析処理の例を説明する。以下で説明される分析処理の例において、第1蛍光情報として、第1蛍光強度(「SFL-1強度」ともいう)が用いられ、第2蛍光情報として、第2蛍光強度(「SFL-2強度」ともいう)が用いられる。横軸か縦軸のいずれか一方にSFL-1強度をとったスキャッタグラムを「第1スキャッタグラム」とも呼ぶ。また、横軸か縦軸のいずれか一方にSFL-2強度をとったスキャッタグラムを「第2スキャッタグラム」とも呼ぶ。 As an example of step S7 in Figure 12, an example of the analytical processing described in "Example 4 of Fluorescent Dye Applications" above will be explained. In the example of analytical processing described below, the first fluorescence intensity (also called "SFL-1 intensity") is used as the first fluorescence information, and the second fluorescence intensity (also called "SFL-2 intensity") is used as the second fluorescence information. A scattergram with SFL-1 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "first scattergram." Similarly, a scattergram with SFL-2 intensity plotted on either the horizontal or vertical axis is also called the "second scattergram."
図32及び図33に、蛍光色素の用途例4を用いた場合の第1スキャッタグラム及び第2スキャッタグラムの例を示す。図32で示すように、細胞中の顆粒(例えば、好塩基性顆粒)への結合能が核酸(例えば、DNA、RNA)に対する結合能よりも優位な第1蛍光色素に対応するSFL-1を縦軸にとった第1スキャッタグラムでは、BasoがSFL-1の高値側に出現する。図32は検体に幼若顆粒球(Immature Granulocyte:IG)が存在している場合の例である。図32の第1スキャッタグラムでは、Basoのクラスターが幼若顆粒球のクラスターよりもSFL-1の高値側に出現している。第1蛍光色素は、Basoの顆粒(例えば、好塩基性顆粒)への結合能が高いため、Basoのクラスターは、幼若顆粒球のクラスターよりもSFL-1の高値側に出現する。よって、Basoと幼若顆粒球の弁別が可能となる。一方、図33に示すとおり、DNAに対する結合能が、細胞中の顆粒への結合能よりも優位な第2蛍光色素に対応するSFL-2を横軸にとった第2スキャッタグラムでは、有核赤血球、Baso及びその他白血球を弁別できる。第1及び第2蛍光色素は、細胞に対する染色特性、及び、蛍光特性が互いに異なる。このような蛍光色素を用いることで、1つの測定チャネルによる測定動作によって、Basoを含む白血球と有核赤血球との分類と、Basoと幼若顆粒球の弁別と、が実行可能となる。 Figures 32 and 33 show examples of the first and second scattergrams when using example 4 of the fluorescent dye. As shown in Figure 32, in the first scattergram, where SFL-1 is plotted on the vertical axis, corresponding to the first fluorescent dye whose binding ability to granules in cells (e.g., basophilic granules) is superior to its binding ability to nucleic acids (e.g., DNA, RNA), Baso appears on the higher SFL-1 side. Figure 32 is an example where immature granulocytes (IG) are present in the sample. In the first scattergram of Figure 32, Baso clusters appear on the higher SFL-1 side than immature granulocyte clusters. Because the first fluorescent dye has a high binding ability to granules of Baso (e.g., basophilic granules), Baso clusters appear on the higher SFL-1 side than immature granulocyte clusters. Therefore, differentiation between Baso and immature granulocytes becomes possible. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 33, in the second scattergram with SFL-2, the second fluorescent dye whose DNA binding ability is superior to its binding ability to granules in cells, plotted on the horizontal axis, nucleated red blood cells, Baso, and other white blood cells can be differentiated. The first and second fluorescent dyes have different staining and fluorescence properties for cells. By using such fluorescent dyes, classification of white blood cells including Baso and nucleated red blood cells, and differentiation between Baso and immature granulocytes can be performed with a single measurement channel.
図32及び33の例において、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、第1蛍光色素と第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に基づく分析(第1分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、染色特性の違いに応じて染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光色素による第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に対応する第1集団(図32に示される細胞の集団)と、第2蛍光色素による第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に対応する第2集団(後述の図33に示される細胞の集団)と、に分類する。図32及び図33の例では、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に基づくスキャッタグラム(図32の例)と、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に基づくスキャッタグラム(図33の例)によって、細胞を分類している。 In the examples shown in Figures 32 and 33, the analysis unit 300 performs an analysis (first analysis) based on the differences in staining characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes, and the differences in fluorescence characteristics between the first and second fluorescent dyes. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained according to the differences in staining characteristics into a first group (the group of cells shown in Figure 32) corresponding to the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) from the first fluorescent dye, and a second group (the group of cells shown in Figure 33, described later) corresponding to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) from the second fluorescent dye. In the examples of Figures 32 and 33, the analysis unit 300 classifies the cells using a scattergram based on the first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1) (example in Figure 32) and a scattergram based on the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2) (example in Figure 33).
図32の例において、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第1の成分(図32の例では顆粒)に関する違いに基づく分析(第2分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第1蛍光色素で第1の成分(図32の例では顆粒)が染色された複数の細胞を、第1蛍光強度(SFL-1)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、顆粒の中でもBasoに含まれる好塩基性顆粒への結合能が高い。第1蛍光色素は、例えば、幼若顆粒球に含まれる顆粒にも結合能を有するが、Basoに含まれる好塩基性顆粒への結合能よりも低い。よって、BasoのクラスターのSFL-1は、幼若顆粒球のSFL-1よりも高くなる。 In the example shown in Figure 32, the analysis unit 300 performs a second analysis based on differences in the first component (granules in the example of Figure 32) among the measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with the first fluorescent dye for the first component (granules in the example of Figure 32) into multiple groups according to their first fluorescence intensity (SFL-1). The first fluorescent dye has a high binding affinity to basophilic granules, such as those contained in Baso, among other granules. The first fluorescent dye also has binding affinity to granules contained in immature granulocytes, for example, but its binding affinity is lower than that to basophilic granules contained in Baso. Therefore, the SFL-1 of Baso clusters will be higher than that of immature granulocytes.
図33の例において、分析ユニット300は、測定された複数の細胞における第2の成分(図33の例ではDNA)に関する違いに基づく分析(第3分析)を行っている。例えば、分析ユニット300は、第2蛍光色素で第2の成分(図33の例ではDNA)が染色された複数の細胞を、第2蛍光強度(SFL-2)に応じた複数の集団に分類する。図33の例では、分析ユニット300は、SFL-2に基づいて、Baso、Baso以外の成熟白血球、及び、有核赤血球を分類する。 In the example shown in Figure 33, the analysis unit 300 performs a third analysis based on differences in a second component (DNA in the example of Figure 33) among the measured cells. For example, the analysis unit 300 classifies multiple cells stained with a second fluorescent dye for a second component (DNA in the example of Figure 33) into multiple groups according to the second fluorescence intensity (SFL-2). In the example of Figure 33, the analysis unit 300 classifies Baso, non-Baso mature leukocytes, and nucleated erythrocytes based on SFL-2.
図12を参照して、上記の分析処理を終了すると、分析ユニット300は、ステップS8において、分析結果を表示部306に出力して処理を終了する。分析ユニット300は、例えば、分析結果として、被検者の臨床的状態に関する情報を提供する。図34A及びBを参照して、表示部306に表示される分析結果の例について説明するが、この例に限定されない。表示部306には、分析結果画面80が表示される。分析結果画面80は、測定項目表示領域81と、リサーチ項目表示領域82と、フラグ表示領域83と、スキャッタグラム表示領域84とを含む。測定項目表示領域81は、正常白血球及び各亜集団に含まれる細胞数に関する情報を表示する。図中、「WBC」は白血球を指し、「NEUT」は好中球集団を指し、「LYMPH」はリンパ球集団を指し、「MONO」は単球集団を指し、「EO」は好酸球集団を指し、「BASO」は好塩基球集団を指す。また、「#」は、単位量当たりの細胞数を示し、「%」は、白血球の総数に対する各亜集団に含まれる細胞数の割合を示す。リサーチ項目表示領域82は、補助的に表示する細胞の数、性状等に関する情報を表示する。フラグ表示領域83は、白血球の増加機序に関する情報を表示する。フラグ表示領域83に表示されるフラグは、例えば、被検者の臨床的状態を示唆する情報である。スキャッタグラム表示領域84は、分析処理において作成したスキャッタグラムを表示する。図34Aを参照して、フラグ表示領域83には、検体に含まれる白血球の増加機序が腫瘍性増加であることを示す情報として、「Malignant?」とのフラグが表示される。また、スキャッタグラム表示領域84には、第1スキャッタグラムが表示される。図34Bを参照して、フラグ表示領域83には、検体に含まれる白血球の増加機序が反応性増加であることを示す情報として、「Reactive?」とのフラグが表示される。また、スキャッタグラム表示領域84には、第2スキャッタグラムが表示される。 Referring to Figure 12, when the above analysis process is completed, the analysis unit 300 outputs the analysis results to the display unit 306 in step S8 and terminates the process. The analysis unit 300 provides, for example, information regarding the clinical condition of the subject as analysis results. Referring to Figures 34A and 34B, an example of the analysis results displayed on the display unit 306 will be described, but it is not limited to this example. The display unit 306 displays the analysis results screen 80. The analysis results screen 80 includes a measurement item display area 81, a research item display area 82, a flag display area 83, and a scattergram display area 84. The measurement item display area 81 displays information regarding normal white blood cells and the number of cells included in each subpopulation. In the figure, "WBC" refers to white blood cells, "NEUT" refers to the neutrophil population, "LYMPH" refers to the lymphocyte population, "MONO" refers to the monocyte population, "EO" refers to the eosinophil population, and "BASO" refers to the basophil population. Furthermore, "#" indicates the number of cells per unit volume, and "%" indicates the ratio of the number of cells in each subpopulation to the total number of white blood cells. The research item display area 82 displays supplementary information such as the number and characteristics of cells. The flag display area 83 displays information regarding the mechanism of white blood cell increase. The flags displayed in the flag display area 83 are, for example, information suggesting the clinical condition of the subject. The scattergram display area 84 displays the scattergram created during the analysis process. Referring to Figure 34A, the flag display area 83 displays the flag "Malignant?" to indicate that the mechanism of white blood cell increase in the sample is neoplastic. The first scattergram is also displayed in the scattergram display area 84. Referring to Figure 34B, the flag display area 83 displays the flag "Reactive?" to indicate that the mechanism of white blood cell increase in the sample is reactive. The second scattergram is also displayed in the scattergram display area 84.
表示部306に表示される分析結果には、RETとPLTに関する結果が含まれてもよい。例えば、RETとPLTの計数結果、及び、スキャッタグラムが表示される。また、例えば、フラグ表示領域83には、RET及びPLTの少なくともいずれかの結果で異常があると判断された場合、その異常に対応するフラグが表示されてもよい。例えば、RETの計数結果に基づき、RETの計数値が閾値よりも低値になった場合、RETが低値であることを示すフラグが表示される。また、例えば、PLTの計数結果に基づき、PLTの計数値が閾値よりも低値になった場合、PLTが低値であることを示すフラグが表示される。表示されるフラグは、例えば、被検者の臨床的状態を示唆する情報である。RETの測定結果は、例えば、被検者が急性白血病や再生不良性貧血を罹患している疑いに関連する。また、PLTの測定結果は、例えば、被検者の止血能や出血リスクに関連する。 The analysis results displayed on the display unit 306 may include results related to RET and PLT. For example, the counting results for RET and PLT, and a scattergram may be displayed. Furthermore, for example, if an abnormality is determined in at least one of the RET and PLT results, a flag corresponding to that abnormality may be displayed in the flag display area 83. For example, based on the RET counting result, if the RET count value falls below a threshold, a flag indicating that RET is low will be displayed. Similarly, based on the PLT counting result, if the PLT count value falls below a threshold, a flag indicating that PLT is low will be displayed. The displayed flags may, for example, provide information suggesting the subject's clinical condition. RE measurement results may, for example, be related to the suspected presence of acute leukemia or aplastic anemia in the subject. PLT measurement results may, for example, be related to the subject's hemostatic ability or bleeding risk.
表示部306に表示される分析結果には、芽球及び前骨髄球に関する結果が含まれてもよい。例えば、分析ユニット300は、芽球が検出されたことに対応するフラグと、前骨髄球が検出されたことに対応するフラグを表示部306に表示させることができる。また、例えば、芽球と前骨髄球に関するスキャッタグラムが表示部306に表示されてもよい。表示されるフラグは、例えば、被検者の臨床的状態を示唆する情報である。芽球及び前骨髄球に関する測定結果は、例えば、被検者の白血病の疑いに関連する。前骨髄球に関連する白血病(急性前骨髄球性白血病)は、早急な治療が予後に影響しうる。急性前骨髄球性白血病に対しては、有効な治療薬がある。よって、血液検体の検査によって、芽球と前骨髄球との弁別ができれば、早急な治療を要する被検者と早急な治療の必要性は低い被検者の弁別が可能となる。 The analysis results displayed on the display unit 306 may include results regarding blast cells and promyelocytes. For example, the analysis unit 300 can display a flag on the display unit 306 corresponding to the detection of blast cells and a flag corresponding to the detection of promyelocytes. Alternatively, a scattergram of blast cells and promyelocytes may be displayed on the display unit 306. The displayed flags may, for example, indicate information suggesting the subject's clinical condition. Measurement results regarding blast cells and promyelocytes are related, for example, to the suspected leukemia of the subject. Prompt treatment can affect the prognosis of promyelocyte-associated leukemia (acute promyelocytic leukemia). Effective medications exist for acute promyelocytic leukemia. Therefore, if blast cells and promyelocytes can be differentiated by blood sample testing, it becomes possible to distinguish between subjects requiring immediate treatment and those with less urgent need for treatment.
表示部306に表示される分析結果には、Basoと幼若顆粒球の弁別に関する結果が含まれてもよい。例えば、表示部306にBasoの計数結果が表示される。分析ユニット300は、検体に幼若顆粒球が出現した場合でもBasoと幼若顆粒球の弁別が可能なので、幼若顆粒球の影響を排除した正確なBasoの計数結果を表示部306に表示可能である。また、例えば、Basoと幼若顆粒球の弁別結果を反映したスキャッタグラムが表示部306に表示されてもよい。表示されるフラグは、例えば、被検者の臨床的状態を示唆する情報である。Basoの異常増加に関連する疾患に、慢性骨髄性白血病がある。Basoと幼若顆粒球とを区別し、各々を正確に計数できれば、Basoの異常増加をより正確に判断可能となる。 The analysis results displayed on the display unit 306 may include results regarding the differentiation between Baso and immature granulocytes. For example, the Baso counting result may be displayed on the display unit 306. Since the analysis unit 300 can differentiate between Baso and immature granulocytes even when they appear in the sample, it is possible to display an accurate Baso counting result on the display unit 306, excluding the influence of immature granulocytes. Furthermore, for example, a scattergram reflecting the differentiation result between Baso and immature granulocytes may be displayed on the display unit 306. The displayed flags may, for example, indicate information suggesting the clinical condition of the subject. Chronic myeloid leukemia is a disease associated with abnormal increases in Baso. If Baso and immature granulocytes can be distinguished and each can be accurately counted, abnormal increases in Baso can be judged more accurately.
12:試薬、20、64:吸引管、21、22、30、33、38、39、452:定量部、36、41:廃液チャンバ、37、V1~V13:電磁バルブ、55:第2チャンバ、56A、56B、433:ポンプ、60、442:試薬容器ホルダ、63:カバー、65:吸引管昇降機構、100:検体容器、100a:蓋、200、R1、R2:試薬容器、200A:第1試薬容器、200B:第2試薬容器、300:分析ユニット、400:測定ユニット、411:光源、411a:第1光源、411b:第2光源、412、412a、412b:側方散乱光受光素子、416:前方散乱光受光素子、422a、422b:側方蛍光受光素子、413:フローセル、418、418a、418b、418c:ダイクロイックミラー、420:(第1)チャンバ、430:送液機構、430a:第1送液機構、430b:第2送液機構、431:送液管、432:定量ブロック、440:試料調製部、440A:第1試料調製部、440B:第2試料調製部、450:検体吸引部、451:検体吸引ノズル、460:FCM検出部、480:測定ユニット制御部、500:測定装置、T:検体 12: Reagent, 20, 64: Suction tube, 21, 22, 30, 33, 38, 39, 452: Quantitative unit, 36, 41: Waste liquid chamber, 37, V1-V13: Solenoid valve, 55: Second chamber, 56A, 56B, 433: Pump, 60, 442: Reagent container holder, 63: Cover, 65: Suction tube lifting mechanism, 100: Sample container, 100a: Lid, 200, R1, R2: Reagent container, 200A: First reagent container, 200B: Second reagent container, 300: Analysis unit, 400: Measurement unit, 411: Light source, 411a: First light source, 411b: Second light source, 412, 412a, 412 b: Side-scattered light receiving element, 416: Forward-scattered light receiving element, 422a, 422b: Side-fluorescence light receiving element, 413: Flow cell, 418, 418a, 418b, 418c: Dichroic mirror, 420: (First) chamber, 430: Fluid delivery mechanism, 430a: First fluid delivery mechanism, 430b: Second fluid delivery mechanism, 431: Fluid delivery tube, 432: Quantitative block, 440: Sample preparation unit, 440A: First sample preparation unit, 440B: Second sample preparation unit, 450: Sample aspiration unit, 451: Sample aspiration nozzle, 460: FCM detection unit, 480: Measurement unit control unit, 500: Measurement device, T: Sample
Claims (23)
前記細胞を電気的に測定する電気式測定部と、
前記細胞を光学的に測定する第1光学式測定部と、
前記検体に含まれる血色素を光学的に測定する第2光学式測定部と、
前記電気式測定部、前記第1光学式測定部、及び、前記第2光学式測定部の少なくとも1つによる測定のための測定試料を調製する試料調製部と、
前記測定試料の測定結果を提供する分析部と、を含み、
前記試料調製部は、
(1)赤血球数、白血球数、血色素量 、ヘマトクリット値、平均赤血球容積、平均赤血
球血色素量、平均赤血球血色素濃度、及び、血小板数を含む第1測定項目、
(2)白血球の形態分類に関する第2測定項目、及び、
(3)前記第1及び第2測定項目とは異なる第3測定項目、
に対応する複数のチャンバと、
前記測定試料の調製に用いられる蛍光色素を含む試薬を収容する複数の試薬容器と、
前記複数のチャンバから前記第1光学式測定部に前記測定試料を送るための流路と、を含み、
前記試料調製部は、前記第1測定項目、前記第2測定項目、又は、前記第3測定項目、の少なくとも1つの測定指示を含む測定オーダーに応じて、前記測定指示に対応する少なくとも1つの前記チャンバと、前記少なくとも1つのチャンバに対応する少なくとも1つの前記試薬容器とを用いて前記測定試料を調製し、
前記試料調製部は、前記測定指示に対応する前記少なくとも1つのチャンバにおいて、前記細胞に対する染色特性、及び、蛍光特性が互いに異なる第1蛍光色素及び第2蛍光色素と、前記検体とを混合して前記測定試料を調製し、
前記第1光学式測定部は、前記細胞の第1の成分に対する染色特性を有する前記第1蛍光色素から生じた第1蛍光信号、及び、前記細胞の第2の成分に対する染色特性を有する前記第2蛍光色素から生じた第2蛍光信号、の少なくとも一つを含む光学的信号を測定し、
前記分析部は、
前記第1及び第2蛍光信号を含む前記光学的信号を参照し、
(A)前記第1蛍光色素と前記第2蛍光色素の染色特性の違い、及び、前記第1蛍光色素と前記第2蛍光色素の蛍光特性の違い、に基づく第1分析、
(B)測定された複数の前記細胞における前記第1の成分に関する違いに基づく第2分析、及び、
(C)測定された複数の前記細胞における前記第2の成分に関する違いに対応する第3分析、
を実行することで、測定された前記細胞を分類する、
測定装置。 A measuring device for analyzing cells contained in a sample taken from a subject,
An electrical measuring unit for electrically measuring the aforementioned cells,
A first optical measuring unit for optically measuring the aforementioned cells,
A second optical measuring unit for optically measuring the hemoglobin contained in the aforementioned sample,
A sample preparation unit for preparing a sample for measurement by at least one of the electrical measurement unit, the first optical measurement unit, and the second optical measurement unit,
Includes an analysis unit that provides the measurement results of the measurement sample,
The sample preparation unit is
(1) First measurement items including red blood cell count, white blood cell count, hemoglobin level, hematocrit value, mean corpuscular volume, mean corpuscular hemoglobin level, mean corpuscular hemoglobin concentration, and platelet count.
(2) The second measurement item related to the morphological classification of white blood cells, and
(3) A third measurement item different from the first and second measurement items,
Multiple chambers corresponding to,
A plurality of reagent containers for containing reagents including a fluorescent dye used in the preparation of the aforementioned measurement sample,
The system includes a flow path for sending the sample to be measured from the plurality of chambers to the first optical measuring unit,
The sample preparation unit prepares the measurement sample in accordance with a measurement order that includes at least one measurement instruction for the first measurement item, the second measurement item, or the third measurement item, using at least one chamber corresponding to the measurement instruction and at least one reagent container corresponding to the at least one chamber.
The sample preparation unit prepares the measurement sample by mixing the sample with a first fluorescent dye and a second fluorescent dye, which have different staining and fluorescence properties for the cells, in at least one chamber corresponding to the measurement instruction.
The first optical measuring unit measures an optical signal that includes at least one of a first fluorescence signal generated from a first fluorescent dye having staining properties for a first component of the cell, and a second fluorescence signal generated from a second fluorescent dye having staining properties for a second component of the cell.
The aforementioned analysis unit is
Referring to the optical signals including the first and second fluorescence signals,
(A) A first analysis based on the difference in staining characteristics between the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye, and the difference in fluorescence characteristics between the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye.
(B) A second analysis based on the differences in the first component in the multiple cells measured, and
(C) A third analysis corresponding to the differences in the second component in the multiple cells measured,
By performing this, the measured cells are classified.
Measuring device.
前記光学的信号に基づく前記細胞の分類を、前記チャンバで調製された前記測定試料ごとに実行する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The aforementioned analysis unit is
The classification of the cells based on the optical signal is performed for each of the measurement samples prepared in the chamber.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記測定オーダーに対応する複数の前記チャンバにおいて、前記複数のチャンバに各々対応する複数の前記測定試料が調製されたことに応じて、前記複数の測定試料ごとに、前記光学的信号に基づく前記細胞の分類を実行する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The aforementioned analysis unit is
In the plurality of chambers corresponding to the measurement order, in accordance with the preparation of the plurality of measurement samples corresponding to each of the plurality of chambers, the classification of the cells based on the optical signal is performed for each of the plurality of measurement samples.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記測定オーダーに対応する複数の前記チャンバにおいて、前記複数のチャンバに各々対応する複数の前記測定試料が調製されたことに応じて 、前記複数の測定試料ごとに、
前記光学的信号に基づく前記細胞の分類を実行し、
前記試料調製部は、
前記複数のチャンバの少なくとも1つにおいて、前記第1蛍光色素及び前記第2蛍光色素を用いて前記測定試料を調製する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The aforementioned analysis unit is
In the plurality of chambers corresponding to the measurement order, in accordance with the fact that a plurality of measurement samples corresponding to each of the plurality of chambers have been prepared, for each of the plurality of measurement samples,
The classification of the cells based on the optical signals is performed.
The sample preparation unit is
In at least one of the plurality of chambers, the measurement sample is prepared using the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記分析部は、
前記第1及び第2蛍光信号を含む前記光学的信号を参照し、前記第1、第2、及び第3分析を実行することで、測定された前記細胞を分類する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The first optical measuring unit measures the optical signal for each of the measurement samples,
The aforementioned analysis unit is
The measured cells are classified by performing the first, second, and third analyses with reference to the optical signals, including the first and second fluorescence signals.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記第1分析において、前記染色特性の違いに応じて染色された複数の前記細胞を、前記第1蛍光色素による前記第1蛍光信号に対応する第1集団と、前記第2蛍光色素による前記第2蛍光信号に対応する第2集団と、に分類する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The aforementioned analysis unit is
In the first analysis, the multiple cells stained according to the differences in staining characteristics are classified into a first group corresponding to the first fluorescence signal from the first fluorescent dye and a second group corresponding to the second fluorescence signal from the second fluorescent dye.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記第2分析において、前記第1蛍光色素で前記第1の成分が染色された複数の前記細胞を、前記第1蛍光信号の強度に応じた複数の集団に分類する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The aforementioned analysis unit is
In the second analysis, the plurality of cells stained with the first fluorescent dye for the first component are classified into a plurality of groups according to the intensity of the first fluorescence signal.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記第3分析において、前記第2蛍光色素で前記第2の成分が染色された複数の前記細胞を、前記第2蛍光信号の強度に応じた複数の集団に分類する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The aforementioned analysis unit is
In the third analysis, the plurality of cells stained with the second fluorescent dye are classified into a plurality of groups according to the intensity of the second fluorescence signal.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 At least one of the plurality of reagent containers contains a reagent containing the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記試料調製部は、
前記第1蛍光色素及び前記第2蛍光色素を含む試薬を収容する少なくとも1つの前記試薬容器と、前記試薬容器に対応する前記チャンバとを接続する送液管を有し、
前記試薬は、前記送液管を介して前記チャンバに供給される、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 At least one of the plurality of reagent containers contains a reagent containing the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye,
The sample preparation unit is
The device has at least one reagent container containing the first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye, and a liquid delivery tube connecting the reagent container and the chamber corresponding to the reagent container,
The reagent is supplied to the chamber via the liquid delivery tube.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記試薬容器に収容された液状の前記試薬内に配置される第一端と前記チャンバに接続される第二端を有する送液管を介して、前記試薬を前記チャンバに送液する送液機構を含む、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The sample preparation unit is
The system includes a liquid delivery mechanism that delivers the reagent to the chamber via a liquid delivery tube having a first end placed in the liquid reagent contained in the reagent container and a second end connected to the chamber,
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記試薬容器に収容された液状の前記試薬内に配置される第一端と前記チャンバに接続される第二端を有する送液管を介して、前記試薬を前記チャンバに送液する送液機構と、
前記試薬容器に対して前記送液管の前記第一端を挿入し、前記第一端を液状の前記試薬内に配置するための機構と、を含む、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The sample preparation unit is
A liquid delivery mechanism for delivering the reagent to the chamber via a liquid delivery tube having a first end placed in the liquid reagent contained in the reagent container and a second end connected to the chamber,
The mechanism includes inserting the first end of the liquid delivery tube into the reagent container and positioning the first end within the liquid reagent.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記試薬容器に収容された液状の前記試薬内に配置される第一端と前記チャンバに接続される第二端を有する送液管を介して、前記試薬を前記チャンバに送液する送液機構と、
前記試薬容器から前記送液管の前記第一端を抜き出すための機構と、を含む、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The sample preparation unit is
A liquid delivery mechanism for delivering the reagent to the chamber via a liquid delivery tube having a first end placed in the liquid reagent contained in the reagent container and a second end connected to the chamber,
A mechanism for withdrawing the first end of the liquid delivery tube from the reagent container,
The measuring device according to claim 1.
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The first optical measuring unit is capable of measuring the optical signal which includes at least one of the first fluorescence signal corresponding to the first fluorescent dye excited in a first wavelength range and the second fluorescence signal corresponding to the second fluorescent dye excited in a second wavelength range different from the first wavelength range.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The first optical measuring unit distinguishes and measures the first fluorescence signal and the second fluorescence signal based on the difference in fluorescence characteristics.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記第1蛍光信号を検出するための第1受光部と、
前記第2蛍光信号を検出するための第2受光部と、を含む
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The first optical measuring unit is,
A first light receiving unit for detecting the first fluorescence signal,
The measuring apparatus according to claim 1, further comprising a second light-receiving unit for detecting the second fluorescence signal.
前記染色特性の違い及び前記蛍光特性の違いに対応する第1情報、測定された前記複数の細胞における前記第1の成分に関する違いに対応する第2情報、及び、測定された前記複数の細胞における前記第2の成分に関する違いに対応する第3情報、を分析する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The aforementioned analysis unit is
The analysis includes first information corresponding to the differences in staining characteristics and fluorescence characteristics, second information corresponding to the differences in the first component in the measured plurality of cells, and third information corresponding to the differences in the second component in the measured plurality of cells.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記測定指示に対応する前記少なくとも1つのチャンバにおいて、前記第1の成分への結合能が第2の成分への結合能よりも高い前記第1蛍光色素、及び、前記第2の成分への結合能が前記第1の成分への結合のよりも高い前記第2蛍光色素と、前記検体とを混合して前記測定試料を調製する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The sample preparation unit is
In at least one chamber corresponding to the measurement instruction, the first fluorescent dye, which has a higher binding ability to the first component than to the second component, and the second fluorescent dye, which has a higher binding ability to the second component than to the first component, are mixed with the sample to prepare the measurement sample.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記第1蛍光色素及び前記第2蛍光色素と、前記検体とを混合することで、前記第2測定項目の測定のための前記測定試料を調製する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The sample preparation unit is
The first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye are mixed with the sample to prepare the measurement sample for measuring the second measurement item.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
記第1蛍光色素及び前記第2蛍光色素と、前記検体とを混合することで、前記白血球を少なくともリンパ球、単球、好中球、及び、好中球に分類するための前記第2測定項目の測定のための前記測定試料を調製する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The sample preparation unit is
The first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye are mixed with the sample to prepare the sample for measuring the second measurement item for classifying the leukocytes into at least lymphocytes, monocytes, neutrophils, and neutrophils.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記第1蛍光色素及び前記第2蛍光色素と、前記検体とを混合することで、前記第1測定項目の測定のための前記測定試料を調製する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The sample preparation unit is
The first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye are mixed with the sample to prepare the measurement sample for measuring the first measurement item.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記第1蛍光色素及び前記第2蛍光色素と、前記検体とを混合することで、CBC(Complete Blood Count)に対応する前記第1測定項目の測定のための前記測定試料を調製する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The sample preparation unit is
The first fluorescent dye and the second fluorescent dye are mixed with the sample to prepare the measurement sample for measuring the first measurement item corresponding to CBC (Complete Blood Count).
The measuring device according to claim 1.
前記細胞の分類結果に応じて、被検者の臨床的状態を示唆する情報を提供する、
請求項1に記載の測定装置。 The aforementioned analysis unit is
Based on the classification results of the aforementioned cells, information suggesting the clinical condition of the subject is provided.
The measuring device according to claim 1.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2024167887A JP2026059656A (en) | 2024-09-26 | 2024-09-26 | Measuring device |
| JP2024-167887 | 2024-09-26 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2026070928A1 true WO2026070928A1 (en) | 2026-04-02 |
Family
ID=99307076
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2025/033735 Pending WO2026070928A1 (en) | 2024-09-26 | 2025-09-25 | Measurement device |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| JP (1) | JP2026059656A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2026070928A1 (en) |
Citations (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2009008525A (en) * | 2007-06-28 | 2009-01-15 | Sysmex Corp | Display method and sample analyzer |
| JP2016511424A (en) * | 2013-03-13 | 2016-04-14 | タホ インスティチュート フォー ルーラル ヘルス リサーチ, エルエルシー | Portable blood counting monitor |
| JP2017223673A (en) * | 2016-06-17 | 2017-12-21 | シスメックス株式会社 | Method for controlling blood analyzer, control device for blood analyzer, blood analyzer, computer program, and storage medium |
| JP2023137082A (en) * | 2022-03-17 | 2023-09-29 | シスメックス株式会社 | Measuring device and analysis method |
| JP2023137147A (en) * | 2022-03-17 | 2023-09-29 | シスメックス株式会社 | Method for classifying leucocyte to subset |
| JP2024095228A (en) * | 2022-12-28 | 2024-07-10 | シスメックス株式会社 | Bone marrow fluid analysis method, sample analysis device, and computer program |
-
2024
- 2024-09-26 JP JP2024167887A patent/JP2026059656A/en active Pending
-
2025
- 2025-09-25 WO PCT/JP2025/033735 patent/WO2026070928A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (6)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2009008525A (en) * | 2007-06-28 | 2009-01-15 | Sysmex Corp | Display method and sample analyzer |
| JP2016511424A (en) * | 2013-03-13 | 2016-04-14 | タホ インスティチュート フォー ルーラル ヘルス リサーチ, エルエルシー | Portable blood counting monitor |
| JP2017223673A (en) * | 2016-06-17 | 2017-12-21 | シスメックス株式会社 | Method for controlling blood analyzer, control device for blood analyzer, blood analyzer, computer program, and storage medium |
| JP2023137082A (en) * | 2022-03-17 | 2023-09-29 | シスメックス株式会社 | Measuring device and analysis method |
| JP2023137147A (en) * | 2022-03-17 | 2023-09-29 | シスメックス株式会社 | Method for classifying leucocyte to subset |
| JP2024095228A (en) * | 2022-12-28 | 2024-07-10 | シスメックス株式会社 | Bone marrow fluid analysis method, sample analysis device, and computer program |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| JP2026059656A (en) | 2026-04-07 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11921106B2 (en) | Sample analyzer and computer program product | |
| CN105891090B (en) | Blood cell analyzer, body fluid analysis method, and control system therefor | |
| CN101236194B (en) | Sample analyzer and control system thereof | |
| JP5619604B2 (en) | Blood analyzer, blood analysis method, hemolyzing agent and staining agent | |
| JP5627634B2 (en) | Blood analyzer and blood analysis method | |
| EP3260842B1 (en) | Hematological analyzer and method for analyzing a sample | |
| CN103776753B (en) | Blood analysis device | |
| EP3654014B1 (en) | Bone marrow fluid analysis method, sample analyzer, and non-transitory storage medium | |
| JP2008175807A (en) | Blood cell analyzer and blood cell analysis method | |
| CN114450589A (en) | Method for analyzing red blood cells in blood sample and blood analysis system | |
| WO2026070928A1 (en) | Measurement device | |
| JP2026059654A (en) | Measuring apparatus, reagents, and analytical methods | |
| Ali et al. | Effect of Storage at Temperature (4C) on Complete Blood Count Parameters | |
| JP2025010969A (en) | Method for detecting platelet aggregation | |
| CN117871370A (en) | Blood analyzer, blood analysis method, and computer-readable storage medium |